JP2013163015A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine which can collect the amusement of a player to prenotification for changing a display form of preservation display.SOLUTION: When changing a display form of preservation display to a first display form (no-change, a color change of a blue color change or a red color change), a first preservation performance (in which a midget or a giant having a brush and a bucket appears) is executed with respect to the preservation display on the basis of the fact that a first prenotification performance for notifying that there is a possibility that a first state (jackpot) may arise should be executed. When changing the display form of the preservation display to a second display form (shape change at a crack or non-crack), a second preservation performance (in which a midget or a giant having a hammer appears) is executed with respect to the preservation display on the basis of the fact that a second prenotification performance for notifying that there is a possibility that a second state (super ready-to-win state) may arise should be executed.

Description

  The present invention provides a plurality of types of identification that can be identified based on the establishment of a variable display start condition that permits the start of variable display (also referred to as “variable display”) after the game medium passes through the start area. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that includes a variation display unit that displays a variation of information and derives and displays a display result, and that shifts to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the variation display unit. In addition, the present invention relates to a gaming machine that holds a predetermined number of upper limit variable displays that do not satisfy the start condition, and determines game contents before the start condition is satisfied.

  Conventionally, as shown in Patent Document 1, in the above gaming machine, when the display mode of the hold display is changed in accordance with the determined game content, and the display mode is changed, the display mode changes. What performs a priori effect (parachute fall) that informs the player in advance of this is known.

JP 2006-015006 A

  However, in the gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1, since the display mode of the hold display is changed to only one type even if a priori effect is performed, it is scarce to attract the player's interest.

  The present invention has been made based on such a background, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can attract the player's interest with respect to a notice that changes the display mode of the hold display.

  The present invention adopts the following means in order to solve the above problems. The reference numerals used in the description of the best mode for carrying out the invention and the drawings to be described later are added in parentheses for reference, but the constituent elements of the present invention are not limited to those added.

First, the invention according to means 1
After the game medium passes through the start area (the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening 14), the start condition of the variable display that allows the start of the variable display (also referred to as “variable display”) is satisfied (first Based on the fact that neither the variation display of the 1 special symbol nor the second special symbol is executed and the game state is not a big hit gaming state) It is provided with a variation display part (first special symbol display 8a, second special symbol display 8b) for derivation display, and it is advantageous for the player when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the variation display part. A gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state),
When the game medium passes through the starting area, numerical data (random R that is a hardware random number (random hit determining random number), big hit type determining random number that is a software random number (random 1), random number for determining a variation pattern type) (Random 2) and numerical data extraction means (game microcomputer 560 for performing the process of S1216 or S1227) for extracting the random number for randomization pattern determination (random 3);
For the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the game medium has passed through the start area, the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means is stored as reserved storage up to a predetermined upper limit number. Reservation storage means (first reservation storage buffer and second reservation storage buffer shown in FIG. 20B);
Before the start condition based on the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means is satisfied, the variable display is in a predetermined first state (big hit) using the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means. Determining means for determining whether or not the change display is in a predetermined second state (super reach) different from the first state (for game control performing the winning effect processing in S1217 or S1228) A microcomputer 560);
Whether or not to change the display to the first state using the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means when the start condition based on the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means is satisfied And a start time state determining means for determining whether or not to change the display to the second state (game control microcomputer 560 for performing the processes of S1220, S1221, S1231, and S1232),
Hold display control means for displaying the hold display for the number of the hold memories in a predetermined display mode (the combined hold storage display unit 18c of the effect display device 9);
Based on the determination result of the determination means, a first notification effect (color change of the hold display) for notifying that there is a possibility of entering the first state and a notice that there is a possibility of entering the second state. For the second notice effect (change in the shape of the hold display), notice effect determination means for determining whether or not to execute before the start condition based on the numerical data determined by the determination means is established ( An effect control microcomputer 100) that performs the processes of S6010, S6027, and S8010;
Based on the fact that the notice effect is determined to be executed by the notice effect determining means, the notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect (the effect control microcomputer 100 that performs the processing of S8108),
Based on the decision to execute the first notice effect, the notice effect executing means changes the display mode of the hold display to the first display mode (FIG. 62 (a): no change, blue, red ) Together with the first display mode when the display mode of the hold display is changed to the first display mode (FIG. 60: a dwarf 1100 or a giant 1200 having a brush 1110 and a bucket 1120 appears. ) And change the display mode of the hold display to a second display mode different from the first display mode based on the decision to execute the second notice effect (FIG. 62B: crack) When the display mode of the hold display is changed to the second display mode, the second hold effect (FIG. 61: a dwarf 1100 with a hammer 1210 or a giant 1200) is displayed. It is a game machine, characterized in that to perform the appearance).

The invention according to means 2
A gaming machine described in means 1,
The notice effect execution means may not change the display mode of the hold display to the first display mode even if the first hold effect is executed (FIG. 62 (a): no change, blue change, red change). ),
The first hold effect has a plurality of types of effects with different ratios of changing the display mode of the hold display to the first display mode (FIG. 59 (c): Appearance of a dwarf with a low degree of expected change in the hold ball And there is a giant who has a high expectation of change in the holding ball)
The notice effect executing means executes any one of the plurality of types of first hold effects based on the decision to execute the first notice effect (a child or A gaming machine characterized by the appearance of a giant.

The invention according to means 3 is
The first display mode has a plurality of types of display modes with different expectation levels for the first state (FIG. 59 (a): no change in the big hit expectation level and blue change in the big hit expectation level at a medium level. And there is a red change with a high expectation of jackpot
The first hold effect has a plurality of types of effects in which the ratio of changing the display mode of the hold display to each of the plurality of types of first display modes is different (FIG. 59 (c): the hold ball change expectation degree is The appearance of a low dwarf and a giant with a high expectation of change in the holding ball)
The notice effect executing means executes any one of the plurality of types of first hold effects based on the decision to execute the first notice effect (a child or A gaming machine characterized by the appearance of a giant.
Here, the “expected degree” means that the ratio selected when not in the first state is different from the ratio selected when in the first state.

The invention according to means 4 is
A gaming machine described in means 2 or 3,
The notice effect execution means executes another hold effect after executing one hold effect of the plurality of types of first hold effects when changing the display mode of the hold display to the first display mode. This is a gaming machine characterized in that it is possible (FIG. 63: change from painting a dwarf to painting a giant in A12, A21).

The invention according to means 5 is
The second holding effect has multiple types of effects (FIG. 61: a dwarf 1100 or a giant 1200 with a hammer 1210 appears),
The notice effect executing means, when changing the display mode of the hold display to the first display mode, after executing one hold effect of the plurality of types of second hold effects, One of the on-hold effects can be executed (FIG. 63: a change from dividing a dwarf at A22 to painting a giant).

The invention according to means 6 is
A gaming machine described in any one of means 1 to 5,
The notice effect execution means includes:
In a state where the display mode of one hold display is changed to the first display mode, it is possible to change the display mode of the other hold display to the first display mode,
The expectation level for the first state indicated by the first display mode in which the other hold display is changed is lower than the expectation level for the first state indicated by the first display mode in which the one hold indication has changed. The game machine is characterized in that the display mode of the other hold display is not changed to the first display mode (if YES in S6018C, the prefetching notice effect is not determined and the prefetching notice effect is not executed). .

  In the above description, an example in which the first state is a big hit and the second state is a super reach has been described. On the contrary, even if the first state is a super reach and the second state is a big hit. good. Further, the first state and the second state may be states other than the big hit or super reach.

  In the above description, the example in which the first notice effect is a change in the color of the hold display and the second notice effect is the change in the shape of the hold display has been described. Thus, the second notice effect may be a color change of the hold display. Furthermore, the first notice effect or the second notice effect may be a change other than a color change or a shape change.

  First, according to the gaming machine according to means 1, when performing the notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold display, one of the two types of hold effects (first hold effect and second hold effect) is executed. The player's interest can be gathered for the notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold display.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine according to the means 2, when executing the first hold effect, any one of a plurality of types of first hold effects is executed with different ratios of changing the display mode of the hold display to the first display mode. Therefore, the player can be interested in the type of the first hold effect.

  Further, according to the gaming machine according to the means 3, when the first hold effect is executed, the ratio of changing the display mode of the hold display to each of a plurality of types of first display modes having different degrees of expectation to be in the first state. Since any one of the different types of first hold effects is executed, the player can be interested in the types of the first hold effects.

  Further, according to the gaming machine according to the means 4, a plurality of types of holding effects are executed while being changed in stages, so that the player can be interested in the execution of the holding effects.

  Further, according to the gaming machine according to the means 5, the hold effect changes step by step and the hold effect changes from the second hold effect to the first hold effect, so that the player can be interested.

  Further, according to the gaming machine according to the means 6, when the expectation level is lower than the already-shown first display mode, the display mode of the other hold display is not changed, so the change of the display mode is complicated. Can be avoided, and the player can be prevented from awakening.

  In addition, this invention also aims at providing the gaming machine of the means 11-16 shown below, and this means 11-16 is arbitrarily applicable to the said means 1-6.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. There is something to be done. Further, there is provided a variable display unit capable of displaying the identification information in a variable manner (also referred to as “variable display”), and when the display result of the variable information identification display is a specific display result in the variable display portion, a predetermined game Some are configured to give value to the player.

  The game value is the right that the state of the variable winning ball apparatus provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine becomes advantageous for a player who is easy to win, and the right for becoming advantageous for a player. In other words, or a condition for winning a prize ball is easily established.

  In a pachinko machine, a specific display mode that is determined in advance is derived and displayed as a display result of a variable symbol special display (identification information) that starts in the variable display section based on the winning of a game ball at the start winning opening. When it is made, “big hit (specific game state)” occurs. The derived display is to stop and display the symbol. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. And the number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  In the variable display section, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) are continuously stopped for a predetermined period of time, in a state that matches the specific display result, There is a possibility that a big hit will occur before the final result is displayed due to the state of scaling or deformation, or multiple symbols changing synchronously with the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol being switched An effect performed in a continuing state (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, the fluctuation display including the reach effect is referred to as reach fluctuation display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes “out of” and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate the big hit.

  This type of gaming machine usually determines immediately whether or not to make a big hit or reach based on the start winning when the game ball starts to win in the start winning opening provided in the game area. Instead, each random number value is read out at a timing when the variable display based on the start winning can be started, and it is determined whether or not to make a big hit or reach.

  On the other hand, such a gaming machine is configured to pre-read each random number value in advance and determine whether or not it will be a big hit or reach before executing the variable display based on the start winning prize. There are some (see, for example, Patent Document 1). In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the game control means holds the stored storage information indicating that there has been a start prize (information indicating which of the two pieces of identification information the start prize is received and the number of reserved memories) Command for designating information) and a command for designating the result of the pre-reading determination are transmitted to the effect control means, and the effect control means is based on the received command before the variable display based on the start winning prize is executed. It is configured so as to determine whether or not to execute a notice effect for notifying the possibility of occurrence or the like (see, for example, JP 2010-35879 A).

  In the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-35879, a highly reliable notice effect according to whether or not a big hit or reach is reached before executing a variable display based on a start winning prize. Can be performed. However, even if a part of the command transmitted at the start winning prize cannot be received normally, the notice effect can be executed, so it is specified by the command that could not be received normally. The notice effect is executed based on information with low credibility, and the reliability of the notice effect may be reduced.

  Therefore, the present invention provides a means for preventing the deterioration of the reliability of the notice effect in the gaming machine capable of executing the notice effect before executing the variable display based on the start winning prize. An object is to provide a gaming machine.

(Means 11) The gaming machine according to the present invention is also referred to as a variable display ("variable display") after a game medium (for example, a game ball) passes through a first start area (for example, the first start winning opening 13). )) To satisfy the start condition of the variable display (for example, neither the variable display of the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is executed, nor is the jackpot gaming state) A first variation display unit (for example, a first special symbol display unit 8a) that performs variation display of a plurality of types of first identification information (for example, a first special symbol) that can be identified, and displays and displays a display result; After the game medium passes through the second start area (for example, the second start winning opening 14), a plurality of types of second identification information (for example, the second special information, for example) can be identified based on the establishment of the start condition. Display) and display the display result. A second variation display unit (for example, a second special symbol display unit 8b) for displaying, and a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed on the first variation display unit or the second variation display unit. And a game control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the progress of the game, and a game control for shifting to a specific game state (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player. An effect device (for example, effect display device 9) that performs an effect (for example, an effect symbol change display) corresponding to the change display in the first change display unit and the second change display unit based on the information from the means. Effect control means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100) for controlling, and the game control means that the game medium has passed through the first start area or the second start area. Furthermore, numerical data (for example, random R (big hit determination random number) which is a hardware random number, big hit type determination random number (random 1) which is a software random number, random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2), and variation pattern determination Numerical data extraction means (for example, a part for executing steps S1216 and S1227 in the game control microcomputer 560) for extracting a random number for use (random 3)) and the game medium has passed through the first start area For a variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied, a first holding storage unit (for example, FIG. 20) that stores numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction unit as a holding storage up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). (First hold storage buffer shown in (B)) and start even though the game medium has passed through the second start area For the variable display for which the condition is not satisfied, the second hold storage unit (for example, FIG. B) and the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means before the start condition based on the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means is established. Determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined state (for example, super reach) (for example, a part for executing steps S1217 and S1228 in the game control microcomputer 560), first hold storage means or second hold Reservation storage information (for example, start winning designation command, total retention A stored memory information transmission means (for example, a part for executing steps S1220, S1221, S1231, and S1232 in the game control microcomputer 560) and determination result information (for example, a determination result of the determination means) The determination result information transmitting means (for example, the portion executing steps S1218, S1219, S1229, and S1230 in the game control microcomputer 560) for transmitting the symbol designating command and the variable category command) and the numerical data extracting means. When the start condition based on the numerical data is satisfied, the starting state determining means (for example, a game) that determines whether or not to change the display to a predetermined state, using the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extracting means. Control microcomputer 60. Steps S61, S62, S74, and S91 to S105 are executed), and the effect control means notifies the advancement that there is a possibility of entering a predetermined state based on the determination result information ( For example, the notice effect determination means (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 100) determines whether or not to execute the prefetch notice effect before the start condition based on the numerical data determined by the determination means is satisfied. Steps S6011, S6027, and S8010) and the notice effect executing means for executing the notice effect based on the decision to execute the notice effect by the notice effect determining means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100). Steps S6016, S6017, and S8108 in FIG. When the storage device specifying information that can specify which one of the first storage device and the second storage device included in the storage information has increased cannot be normally received. In addition, the notice effect restricting means for restricting the execution of the notice effect (for example, in step S6004 and S6006 in the effect control microcomputer 100, when step S6033 is N, step S6033 is executed to start the prefetching notice setting restriction period, and step S8002, A portion where step S8005 is executed when S8003 is Y and the prefetch notice setting restriction period ends). With such a configuration, when the storage device specifying information included in the storage information is not normally received, the execution of the notification effect is limited, so that the notification effect that can be executed before the variable display is performed. It is possible to prevent a decrease in reliability.

(Means 12) In the means 11, the reserved storage information transmitting means includes, as the reserved storage information, reserved storage means specifying information (for example, a start winning designation command), a first reserved storage means, and a second reserved storage means. Transmitting the reserved memory number specifying information (for example, the total reserved memory number designation command) that can specify the number of the reserved memories to be stored (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S1220, S1221, S1231, and S1232). The notice effect restricting means determines the result of specifying which of the first hold storage means and the second hold storage means has increased based on the received hold storage means specifying information, and the received hold If the specified result of the number of reserved memories stored in the first reserved storage means and the second reserved storage means based on the storage number specifying information is inconsistent, a notice is given. Limit the execution of the output (e.g., effect control microcomputer 100, a step S6033 to start the read-ahead notice set restriction period running at N in step S6006) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, since the execution of the notice effect is limited even when the specific result based on the reserved storage means specifying information and the specific result based on the reserved memory number specifying information contradict each other, it can be executed before the variable display is performed. It is possible to prevent a reduction in the reliability of the preliminary announcement effect.

(Means 13) In the means 11 or the means 12, when the notice effect determining means specifies that the determination means determines that the predetermined state is obtained based on the determination result information, the first aspect (for example, “ "Countdown") or the second mode (for example, "change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation", "mode shift") is determined whether to execute the notice effect, and the determination means determines that the predetermined state is not reached If it has been specified, it is determined whether or not to execute the notice effect of the second mode (for example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 executes steps S6010, S6027, and S8010, FIG. As shown in Fig. 3, for the pre-reading notice effect of "change in the variation pattern at the time of symbol change" or "mode transition", the case of non-reach or super-reach out The pre-reading notice effect of “countdown” may be decided only in the case of a super reach jackpot), and the notice effect executing means is restricted from executing the notice effect by the notice effect restricting means. Even if there is, the second aspect of the notice effect can be executed (for example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 executes step S6027 using the prefetch notice distribution table C selected in step S6026). As shown in FIG. 41 (C), it is possible to execute only step S8108 by determining only the pre-reading notice effect of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” or “mode transition” at the time of non-reach. It may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, the second aspect of the notice effect that can be executed both when the predetermined state is reached and when it is not executed can be executed even when execution of the notice effect is restricted. As a result, the reliability of the notice effect that can be executed before the variable display is ensured, and the appearance frequency of the notice effect that can be executed before the variable display can be secured to some extent. Can be made.

(Means 14) In any one of the means 11 to 13, the game control means has passed the first start area or the second start area based on the determination result of the start state determination means. In order, a variation display execution means for executing variation display of the first identification information in the first variation display unit or variation display of the second identification information in the second variation display unit (for example, in the game control microcomputer 560). Steps S52 to S54 are executed to include steps S108, S121, S1125, S1126, S1128, and S3201 to S3204). The reserved storage information transmission means is reserved storage means specifying information (for example, , Start winning designation command) and the number of reserved memories stored in the first reserved storage means and the second reserved storage means Predetermined reserved memory number specifying information (for example, a combined reserved memory number designation command) is transmitted (for example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S1220, S1221, S1231, and S1232), and a notice effect determining means Is determined based on the determination result information when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined state is reached, the first mode (for example, “countdown”) or the second mode (for example, “when symbol changes” ”Change mode of change”, “mode change”) is determined, and when it is determined by the determining means that the predetermined state is not reached, the second mode of notification It is determined whether or not to execute an effect (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes steps S6010, S6027, and S8010. 41, as shown in FIG. 41, the pre-reading notice effect of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” or “mode transition” may be determined even in the case of non-reach deviation or super-reach deviation, The “countdown” pre-reading notice effect may be determined only in the case of a super reach jackpot), even if the notice effect executing means is unable to normally receive the hold storage means specifying information. When the reserved memory number specifying information and the determination result information are normally received, the notice effect of the second mode can be executed (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the pre-read notice notice distribution selected in step S6026). When executing step S6027 using the table C, as shown in FIG. 41C, when the non-reach is off, It may be configured such that step S8108 can be executed by determining only the pre-reading notice effect of “variation mode change” or “mode shift”. According to such a configuration, even when the hold storage means specifying information cannot be normally received, when the hold storage number specifying information and the determination result information are normally received, the predetermined state Since it is possible to execute the second aspect of the notice effect that can be executed both in the case and not, while preventing the reliability of the notice effect that can be executed before the variable display is performed, The appearance frequency of the notice effect that can be executed before the variable display can be secured to some extent, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Means 15) In any one of the means 11 to 14, the notice effect restricting means restricts execution of the notice effect even when the hold storage information and the determination result information cannot be received in a regular order. (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute the step S6033 to start the prefetch notice setting restriction period when the answer is N in step S6004). According to such a configuration, even if the hold storage information and the determination result information cannot be received in a regular order, the execution of the notice effect is limited, so that the notice effect that can be executed before the variable display is performed. It can prevent that reliability falls.

(Means 16) In any one of the means 11 to means 15, the effect control means specifies the number of reserved memories stored in the first reserved memory means and the second reserved memory means based on the reserved memory information. Then, the hold display control for displaying the hold display of the specified number of hold memories in a predetermined display mode (for example, first normal display (red round display), second normal display (blue round display)). Means (for example, a part for executing steps S6021 and S6022 in the production control microcomputer 100), and the hold display control means cannot normally receive the hold storage information or the determination result information. However, when recognizing that the hold storage has increased in the first hold storage means or the second hold storage means, the hold display corresponding to the increased hold storage is set as a predetermined display mode. Different special display modes (e.g., missed aspect (green round Display)) for displaying (e.g., partial executes step S6032 in effect control microcomputer 100) may be configured so. According to such a configuration, even if the hold storage information or the determination result information cannot be normally received, the number of the hold storage can be recognized by the player, and the player is distrusted. Can be prevented.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the symbol designation | designated command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance specific area | region and a holding buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol display control process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the command storage area at the time of a start winning prize. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch notice effect determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch notice effect determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows prefetch notice effect determination processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a prefetch notice allocation table. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end effect process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a prefetch notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a prefetch notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a prefetch notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a prefetch notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution timing of prefetch notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution timing of prefetch notice effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a prefetch notice setting restriction | limiting period. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a prefetch notice setting restriction | limiting period. It is explanatory drawing which shows the some production system regarding a reservation ball | bowl change. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect (color change: jackpot expectation degree) of a reservation ball | bowl change. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect (shape change: super reach expectation degree) of a reservation ball | bowl change. It is explanatory drawing which shows distribution of the change aspect of a holding ball. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect distribution at the time of the color determination of a holding ball. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect distribution at the time of the shape determination of a holding ball. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the table for reservation ball display processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the table for reservation ball display processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution timing of prefetch notice effect.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. On the display screen of the effect display device 9, there is an effect symbol display area for performing a variation display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. “Variable display” is also referred to as “variable display”. In the effect symbol display area, there is a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display. When the change display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the change display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, the fluctuation display including the reach effect is referred to as reach fluctuation display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variation display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate the big hit.

  Note that, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the effect symbol display is performed as a liquid crystal display effect in the effect display device 9, but the effect performed in the effect display device 9 is the one shown in this embodiment. For example, an effect having a predetermined story characteristic may be executed, and an effect may be executed in which the result of the story is displayed based on the determination result of the jackpot determination or the variation pattern. For example, perform a battle effect where professional wrestling and soccer matches and enemy characters fight, perform an effect to win the game and battle if it is a big hit, and perform an effect to defeat the game and battle if it is off Also good. Further, for example, instead of displaying the result such as winning or losing, an effect may be executed in which a predetermined story such as a story is developed in order.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying a fourth symbol after the effect symbol, a special symbol described later, and a normal symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol described later, There is provided a fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variation display of the effect symbol is varied on the effect control microcomputer 100 side). This is done by measuring the variation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing an effect using the effect display device 9, for example, the effect content including the change display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects such as effects being performed and effects in which movable objects shield all or part of the screen. For this reason, even if the display screen on the effect display device 9 is viewed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not the state of the present variation is being displayed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further displaying the variation of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation and does not disappear from the screen or is not shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be seen.

  The 4th symbol for the first special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation (variation display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state where the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is synchronized with the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. The variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display unit 8b is synchronized with the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. Synchronous means that the start point and end point of variable display are the same and the period of variable display is the same. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the loss. Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red.Note that the display color varies depending on the type of big hit (15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, or 2R probability variation big hit) When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the display color reminiscent of the jackpot in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. (The display color is different from the loss. For example, the display color is blue in the case of loss and red in the case of a big hit. The display color may be changed depending on whether it is 5R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit). The display color at the time is desirably a display color (for example, black) different from the background image in order to prevent the display color from being assimilated with the background image and disappearing.

  In this embodiment, the case where the 4th symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown, but a light emitter such as a lamp or LED is used separately from the effect display device 9. Thus, the fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation of the fourth symbol (variation display) may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed may be indicated depending on whether or not it is displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the 4th symbol display area common with respect to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using light-emitting bodies, such as a lamp | ramp and LED. In this case, when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the display of different display colors at certain time intervals may be performed by distinguishing and executing the variation display of the fourth symbol by performing display that repeatedly turns on and off. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, The display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display that repeatedly turns on and off at different time intervals. In addition, for example, when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the same big hit symbol is obtained. However, you may make it stop-display the stop symbol of a different aspect.

  On the left side of the lower part of the game board 6, there is provided a first special symbol display (first variation display unit) 8a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 8a is realized by a simple and small display device (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the lower right side of the game board 6, a second special symbol display (second variation display unit) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Moreover, the 1st special symbol display device 8a and the 2nd special symbol display device 8b may each be comprised so that the numerical value (or 2-digit symbol) of 00-99 may be variably displayed, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variation display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14 after passing (including winning)), the variable display start condition (for example, the number of reserved memory is not 0, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed when the variable display time (variable time) elapses. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  On the side of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory) is displayed. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a comprising four displays is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  On the side of the second special symbol display 8b, a second special symbol hold memory display 18b comprising four displays for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. Is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. And whenever the fluctuation | variation display by the 2nd special symbol display 8b is started, the number of the indicators to light is reduced by one.

  In addition, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there is provided a total pending storage display unit 18c for displaying the total number (total number of pending pending storage) that is the sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count. ing. In this embodiment, the total pending storage display unit 18c that displays the total number is provided, so that it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition. . In this embodiment, in the total hold storage display unit 18c, the first hold storage and the second hold storage are displayed side by side in the order of winning in the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, It is displayed in a manner capable of recognizing whether it is the first holding memory or the second holding memory (for example, the first holding memory is displayed with a white holding ball, and the second holding memory is displayed with a gray holding ball. )

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol indicator 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol indicator 8b. The effect symbol as a symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the change display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variation display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, the game control microcomputer 560 that controls the change display of the special symbol transmits a change pattern command that can specify the change time, and the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the change pattern command. The variation display of the effect symbol is controlled according to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command. Therefore, since the variation time is specified based on the variation pattern command, the variation display of the special symbol and the variation display of the effect symbol should be executed in synchronization in principle. However, in the unlikely event that the data of the variation pattern command is garbled, the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side There may be a gap between them. For this reason, when an unexpected situation such as garbled command data occurs, there is a possibility that the special symbol variation display and the production symbol variation display are not completely synchronized.

  In addition, since the effect control microcomputer 100 can specify the change time based on the received change pattern command, is the time required for the reserved ball change effect (referred to as “holding ball change effect time”) less than the change time? It is also possible to determine whether or not to perform the control to execute the reserved ball change effect only when the reserved ball change effect time <the variation time. In this embodiment, when the reserved ball change effect time specified from the change pattern command is longer than the change time, the reserved ball change effect is carried over to the next change.

  On the left side of the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a movable member 78 that is attached to the rotation shaft of the motor 86 and moves when the motor 86 rotates is provided. In this embodiment, the movable member 78 operates when a pseudo-series effect or a notice effect (movable object notice effect) is executed. Further, in the decorative portion around the effect display device 9, a blade-shaped movable member (hereinafter referred to as an effect blade accessory) that is attached to the rotating shaft of the motor 87 and moves when the motor 87 rotates is provided below the left and right. 79a and 79b are provided. In this embodiment, the production blade actors 79a and 79b operate when a notice production (production blade production notice production) is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  The game area 6 is also provided with winning ports (ordinary winning ports) 29, 30, 33, and 39 for paying out a predetermined number of premium game balls determined in advance based on winning of the game balls. The game balls won in the winning openings 29, 30, 33, 39 are detected by the winning opening switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the display variation of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when lit) are alternately lit to perform variable display. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. In addition, a high probability state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is a high probability state (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a variation display result of a special symbol is increased compared to the normal state) However, with the exception of the high probability / low base state described later), the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are increased. .

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for taking in a hit ball that has not won. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  The members constituting the hitting ball supply tray 3 are provided with operation buttons 120 as operation means that can be operated by the player. The operation button 120 is provided with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player. The operation button 120 is provided not only with a push button switch that can be pressed by the player, but also with a dial that can be rotated by the player. The player can make a predetermined selection (for example, selection of effects) by rotating the dial.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display 8a starts the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the change display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 14 and is detected by the second start port switch 14a, if the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 2), the second special symbol display unit 8b starts the variation display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts the variation display of the effect symbol. That is, the change display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when a big hit is made, the game is shifted to a so-called probability change state after the big hit game is finished, the game state is changed to a high probability state, and the game ball is easily started and won (that is, a special symbol display). Transition to the high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that the execution condition of the variable display in the devices 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 is easily established. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start. In this embodiment, when a big hit is made, the game is always shifted to the probability change state. However, when the big hit is made, the game may be shifted to a so-called short-time state in addition to the probability change state. A machine may be configured. In this case, the high base state may be shifted even in the short time state.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 will be a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state where it is easy to start a winning (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time-short state where the fluctuation time (variation display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, the transition time of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened by shifting to the short time state where the variation time (variation display period) of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened. The frequency of being played (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory becomes faster), and the situation where an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it is easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data (a special symbol process flag or the like) corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means, and data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the special symbol variation display. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the start port switch 13a, the count switch 23, and the winning port switches 29a, 30a, 33a, 39a to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Yes. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, which variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10, which variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 that displays effect symbols in a variable manner is performed.

  In addition, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board and the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35. The sound output from the speaker 27 is controlled via the sound output board 70.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads out image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  The effect control CPU 101 drives the motor 86 to operate the movable member 78 via the output port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 drives a motor 87 for operating the effect blades 79 a and 79 b via the output port 106.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs a signal from the operation button 120 via the input port 107 in response to a pressing operation of the operation button 120 by the player.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED and the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, signals for driving LEDs and lamps are input to the LED / lamp driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED / lamp driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter provided on the frame side such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED and the lamp. Further, a current is supplied to the decoration LED 25 and the like provided on the game board side.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  The production control microcomputer 100 updates the numerical data of the counter in accordance with the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 1) and the upper limit value (for example, 100) are set, The time of starting winning that occurs at random timing (specifically, when the production control microcomputer 100 receives a command for starting winning from the game control microcomputer 560) is the time of reading (extracting) numerical data. Based on the above, it has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random value. In the present embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 has a plurality of random number generation functions including a plurality of counters. In this embodiment, the production control CPU 101 operates at a predetermined time (game control microcomputer 560). When the start winning command is received from the first counter, a value is extracted from a predetermined counter, the extracted value is a random X value, a value is extracted from the predetermined counter, and the extracted value is a random Y value. To do. In the present embodiment, the random X is the color of the reserved sphere (no change, blue or red) or the shape (not cracked or cracked) when performing the pre-reading notice effect of the effect mode of “change in reserved sphere”. Random Y determines the production number (which production number is to be produced) when performing the pre-reading notice production of the production mode of “change in reserved ball”. It shall be used when

  In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the production mode of the pre-reading notice production (“change of variation mode at the time of symbol variation”, “mode transition”, “countdown”, or “change of reserved ball”). Random number for determining the pre-reading notice effect for determining, and the effect for determining the effect system (either “color change” or “shape change”) when performing the pre-reading notice effect of “holding ball change” It also has a function of generating system determination random numbers. The effect control CPU 101 extracts a value from a predetermined counter at a predetermined time (when a command for starting winning is received from the game control microcomputer 560), and extracts the extracted random number for determining the prefetching notice effect type. To determine the pre-reading notice effect mode. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a value from a predetermined counter at a predetermined time (when a start winning command is received from the game control microcomputer 560), and the value of the extracted effect system determination random number To determine the production system.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of a clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  After confirming that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power outage such as an unexpected power outage, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating a gaming state before stopping power supply (special symbol process flag, high probability flag, high base flag, etc.), and an area (output) where the output state of the output port is saved Port buffer), a portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 gives a display result designation command designating the display result (15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit, small hit or loss) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 80. It transmits to (step S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, for example, when the value of a special symbol pointer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 56 also transmits a first symbol variation designation command and a second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 13). You may make it do. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 may resume the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command or the second symbol variation designation command.

  In this embodiment, the value of a variable time timer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, measurement of the saved variation time timer value is resumed, and the variation display of the special symbol is resumed and saved. When the value of the changed time timer has timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is further transmitted. In this embodiment, a special symbol process flag value, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  Note that the display result designation command is not necessarily transmitted when the power failure is restored, but the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is zero. . If the value of the variation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the variation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state has not been reached, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that the power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, the fluctuation occurs at the time of the power failure. The display result designation command may not be transmitted because it is determined that it is not in the middle.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. In addition, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol per-determining random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state are initialized. A value is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been performed, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 503 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit, The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win for a normal symbol (normal random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using effect symbols that are variably displayed on the effect display device 9. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is always executed (however, in the case of the sudden probability variation big hit, the reach probability sudden hit symbol (for example, “135”) is not reached but reached. May be stopped). When the display result of the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery to determine the variation pattern type and variation pattern using random numbers. To do. However, it is the production control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the reach production control.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). About the 1st special symbol display 8a, the 2nd special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output with respect to each display according to the content of the output buffer set by step S32, S33. Execute control.

  Also, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the change display state of the effect symbol is displayed after the effect symbol change display is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effects that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching reach. Such a variation display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal shift”) variation display mode in a case where the variation display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the change display state of the effect symbol is displayed after the effect symbol change display is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variation display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variation display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach disengagement”) when the variation display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variation display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9 (provided that the probability sudden hit is sudden) In some cases, the probability change big hit symbol (for example, “135”) is stopped and displayed without being reached).

  When “5”, which is a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display variation display mode is “suddenly probable big hit” on the effect display device 9. In the same manner as in the case where the effect symbol is displayed, a predetermined small hit symbol (same as the sudden probability variable big hit symbol, for example, “135”) may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “5”, which is the small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  Here, the small win is a hit that is allowed up to a small number of times that the big winning opening is opened compared to the big win (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). When the small hit game ends, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probability variation state to the normal state or from the normal state to the certain variation state. In addition, the sudden probability change big hit is allowed up to a small number of times of opening of the big prize opening in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice), but the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely large. It is a big hit that is a short jackpot and the game state after the big hit game is shifted to a probable state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it suddenly became a probable state) Is). In other words, in this embodiment, the sudden winning odds and the small wins have the same opening pattern of the big prize opening. By controlling in such a way, if the winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is impossible to recognize whether it is suddenly a big hit or a small hit, so a high probability state for the player (Probable change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  As shown in this embodiment, when the big hit types are all probability variation big hits (in this embodiment, 15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit), It does not have to be provided. In addition, when the big hit types are all probabilistic big hits, it is preferable to provide a sudden probable big hit that does not involve the high base state only by shifting to the high probability state. . However, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the ratio of the super reach when the high probability / low base state is set at the time of the 71st variation display after the end of the big hit game is increased. In the case of providing a sudden probability variation jackpot with a high probability / low base state, the probability of all variations display is high until the variation display for the 71st rotation is terminated after the jackpot game with the sudden probability variation jackpot is terminated. / Because it is in the state controlled to the low base state, the ratio of super reach becomes high in all the change displays until the probability variation state ends. Therefore, in the case of providing a sudden probability variation big hit that becomes a high probability / low base state, the ratio of the super reach in the high probability / low base state is not necessarily increased every time, but the super reach is achieved. You may make it provide the time of raising a ratio, and the time of not raising (it is a normal ratio). In addition, for example, instead of looking at the gaming state (for example, whether or not a high probability flag or a high base flag is set), the number of variable displays after the big hit game is counted, and the 71st variable display is obtained. Only occasionally you may increase the percentage of superreach. With such a configuration, when a sudden probability change big hit that becomes a high probability / low base state is provided, after the big hit game by the sudden probability change big hit is finished, the super reach of each time the change display until the probability change state ends It is possible to prevent a state in which the appearance rate is continuously increased.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach are used as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “out of” and the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. A variation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. Also, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are shown as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “out of” and the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-2 and Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-2 are prepared. Note that, as shown in FIG. 6, re-variation is performed once for the variation pattern of the non-reach PA 1-4 that is used in the case where the reach is not performed and is accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect. Of the variation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, when normal PB2-1 is used, re-variation is performed once. Of the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when normal PB2-2 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 among the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition effects, re-variation is performed three times. Here, re-variation means that the effect symbol variation display is executed again after temporarily halting the effect symbol that is temporarily off from the start of the effect symbol variation display until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the special symbol variation display result is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. -3 to Normal PB2-4, Super PA3-3 to SuperPA3-4, Super PB3-3 to Super PB3-4, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-3, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-2 Is prepared. In FIG. 6, the fluctuation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 and special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are fluctuation patterns used when sudden probability change big hit or small hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, when the normal PB2-3 is used among the fluctuation patterns that are used when the sudden sudden change is not big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, the re-variation is performed once. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-4 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-3 to super PA3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used for reaching and have the effect of pseudo-ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, regarding the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 that is used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit and accompanied by the effect of pseudo-ream, re-variation is performed once.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, when the variation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, the variation time is 32 in the case of Super Reach A with pseudo-ream). In the case of Super Reach A without pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds). For example, even in the case of the same type of Super Reach Depending on the total number of pending storage, the variation time may be varied. For example, even when the same type of super reach is involved, the variation time may be shortened as the total number of pending storage increases. Also, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the first reserved memory number. When the variable display of the two special symbols is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the second reserved memory number. In this case, a separate determination table is prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the reserved memory numbers 0 to 2 and the reserved memory numbers 3 and 4). For example, a determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number, and the change time may be varied.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit, which will be described later) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined by using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) and then by using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and include a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B. It may be divided into variable pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-reams, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo ream or a slip effect.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of 15R probability variation per unit, 10R probability variation per unit, and 2R probability variation per unit, normal CA3-1, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and normal reach And normal CA3-2, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with pseudo-continuations, and super CA3-3, which is a variation pattern type with super reach. In addition, in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and special CA4-2 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach. ing. Further, in the case of small hits, it is classified into special CA4-1 which is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern. Further, in the case of a deviation, it is a non-reach CA 2-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with no reach and a specific effect, and a variation pattern type that includes a change pattern with a specific effect without a reach. Non-reach CA2-2, non-reach CA2-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of shortened variation without reach and specific effects, and normal CA2-4 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach And normal CA2-5 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and two re-variation pseudo-continuations, and normal CA2 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with one normal reach and one re-variation pseudo-continuation -6 and super CA2-7 which is a variation pattern type with super reach Are the type divided into.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number (1) and the random number for determination per ordinary symbol (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that a software random number instead of a hardware random number may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each value described in the left column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each value described in the right column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the probability change jackpot determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is a jackpot determination value.

  In this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted to a high probability state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the big hit lottery is increased, and also to a high base state, There are two cases: a case where only the probability state is transferred and a state where the high base state is not transferred (ie, the low base state). Is a jackpot determination table for probability variation, and a normal jackpot determination table is used in other cases. As will be described later, in this embodiment, when a big hit is made, the game is shifted to a high probability state and a high base state after the big hit game ends. After the big hit, the probability variation state continues until the variation display is terminated 71 times. However, after the big hit, the high base state is ended when the variable display is ended 70 times, and is shifted to the low base state, and only the high probability state is continued until the variable display is ended 71 times. Therefore, in this embodiment, after the big hit, from the end of the 70th fluctuation display to the end of the 71st fluctuation display, only the high probability state is transferred and the high base state is transferred. There may be a certain probability change state (which is a low base state).

  8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and a small hit determination table used when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value described in FIG. 8B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), the values shown in FIG. Each numerical value listed is set. Moreover, the numerical values described in FIGS. 8B and 8C are small hit determination values.

  Note that it may be determined that a small hit is made only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Even if the game state is shifted to the probability change state, a small hit will be generated, and if it is configured to produce an effect asking whether or not the probability change will occur, even though the current game state is the probability change state On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoying. Therefore, if it is configured so that the small hit does not occur during the variation display of the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the probability variation state, it is difficult for the small hit to occur and the excessive effect is not given to the probability variation. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the big hit determination values, the special symbol is decided to be big hit (15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit, which will be described later). Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, “probabilities” shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C indicate the probability (ratio) of small hits. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, when using the small hit determination table (second special symbol), a case where the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. The ratio determined as “small hit” is higher than when the variable display is executed.

  FIGS. 8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. FIG. Among these, FIG. 8 (D) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. Further, FIG. 8E shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b, when it is determined that the fluctuation display result is a jackpot symbol, based on the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type, This table is referred to in order to determine one of “10R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit”, and “sudden probability variation big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, eight determination values are assigned to “suddenly probable big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes). In the jackpot type determination table 131b, two judgment values are assigned to “sudden probability variation jackpot” (a ratio of 2/40). Will suddenly be determined to be a promising big hit). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio determined as “suddenly probable big hit” is high. Note that “sudden probability variation big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table 131a, and “sudden probability variation big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table 131b (ie, It may be determined that “suddenly probable big hit” may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), a sudden probability variation big hit as the first specific gaming state to which a predetermined amount of game value is given and an amount larger than the game value There are cases where 15 rounds of probability variation big hit “15R probability variation big hit”, 10 rounds probability variation big hit “10R probability variation big hit” and 2 rounds probability variation big hit “2R probability variation big hit” as the second specific gaming state to which the game value is given. In addition, there is a case where it is determined that the first specific gaming state is determined at a high rate when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, but the game value to be given is shown in this embodiment. The number of rounds is not limited. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the allowable amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the big winning opening per round is increased as the gaming value is determined. Also good. Further, for example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the opening time of the big winning opening per game during the big hit may be determined as the gaming value. In addition, for example, even if the same 15 round big hits, the first specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening once per round and the second specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening multiple times per round It may be prepared to increase the gaming value of the second specific gaming state by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in any case of the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, when the big winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, all 15 rounds in the case of the first specific gaming state) In the case of the second specific gaming state, there is an undigested round remaining), and it is possible to execute an effect in such a manner as to inquire whether or not the jackpot continues further. And in the case of the first specific gaming state, all the 15 rounds have been finished internally, so the big hit game is finished, and in the case of the second specific gaming state, there remains an undigested round internally. For this reason, the jackpot game may be continued (the effect that the bonus winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after finishing the bonus hit of 15 times).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, the types of big hits include “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit” and “sudden probability variation big hit”. In this embodiment, the case where the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is three types of 15 rounds, 10 rounds, and 2 rounds, but the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is the number of rounds executed in this implementation. It is not limited to those shown in the form. For example, a 7R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a seven-round jackpot game and a 5R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a five-round jackpot game may be provided. In this embodiment, there are four types of jackpot types: “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit”, and “sudden probability variation big hit”. Instead, for example, five or more types of jackpot types may be provided. Conversely, the jackpot type may be less than four types, for example, only two types of jackpot types may be provided.

  “15R probable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to 15 rounds of big hit gaming state, and shifts to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state ends (in this embodiment, the high base state and high base The state is also shifted to (see steps S166 to S169 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the high base state ends when the fluctuation display ends 70 times (see steps S169 and S144), and the high probability state ends when the fluctuation display ends 71 times (see steps S167 and S140). .

  The “10R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a 10-round big hit gaming state and shifts to the probability changed state after the big hit gaming state ends (in this embodiment, the high probability state and the high The state is also shifted to (see steps S166 to S169 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the high base state ends when the fluctuation display ends 70 times (see steps S169 and S144), and the high probability state ends when the fluctuation display ends 71 times (see steps S167 and S140). .

  The “2R probability variable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to a two-round big hit gaming state and shifts to the probability changing state after the big hit gaming state ends (in this embodiment, the high probability state and the high The state is also shifted to (see steps S166 to S169 described later). After the transition to the probability variation state, the high base state ends when the fluctuation display ends 70 times (see steps S169 and S144), and the high probability state ends when the fluctuation display ends 71 times (see steps S167 and S140). .

  Note that “2R probability variation big hit” is a big hit that allows only two (2 rounds) opening of the big prize opening as in the case of “sudden probability variation big hit” described later. The open time of the big prize opening per round is long (in this embodiment, 29 seconds). Therefore, in the case of “suddenly promising big hit”, which will be described later, it is almost impossible to expect the game ball to win the big winning opening during the big hit game, but in the case of “2R probable big hit”, the big winning Although the number of times the mouth is opened is small, it can be expected that the game ball will win the big prize mouth during the big hit game.

  The “sudden probability change big hit” is the number of times that the big winning opening is less than “15R probability change big hit” or “10R probability change big hit” (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). The jackpot allowed up to. In other words, when “suddenly promising big hit”, the game is controlled to a two round big hit gaming state. In addition, “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, and “2R probability variation big hit” have a long opening time of 29 seconds per round, whereas “sudden probability variation big hit” takes one round. The opening time of the winning jackpot is as short as 0.1 seconds, and it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to win a winning prize during the big hit game. In this embodiment, after the sudden probability change big hit gaming state is finished, the state is changed to the probability change state (in this embodiment, the state is changed to the high probability state and is also changed to the high base state. (See S166 to S169). After the transition to the probability variation state, the high base state ends when the fluctuation display ends 70 times (see steps S169 and S144), and the high probability state ends when the fluctuation display ends 71 times (see steps S167 and S140). .

  As described above, in this embodiment, even in the case of “small hit”, the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds each, Similar control is performed. In the case of “small hit”, the game state does not change after the opening of the big winning opening twice, and the game state before “small hit” is maintained. By doing so, it is made impossible to recognize whether it is “suddenly promising big hit” or “small hit”, and the interest of the game is improved. As shown in this embodiment, when the big hit types are all probability variation big hits (in this embodiment, 15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit), It does not have to be provided. In addition, when the big hit types are all probabilistic big hits as in this embodiment, when a small hit is provided, only sudden transition with high base state without high base state is performed. It is preferable to provide it (the opening pattern of the big prize opening is also the same for the case of sudden probability change big hit and small hit). However, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the ratio of becoming super reach when executing the 71st fluctuation display after the end of the big hit game is increased, but suddenly without the small hit and the high base state. When it is configured to provide a probable big hit, when the ratio of super reach is not necessarily increased every time in the 71st fluctuation display, but when the ratio of super reach is increased or not increased (the normal ratio is maintained) And a variation pattern may be selected with the same selection ratio / selection method as in the low probability / low base state in the high probability state after suddenly probable big hit. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a state in which the appearance rate of super reach becomes permanently high in the 71st variation display after the end of the big hit.

  The big hit type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values that are compared with a random 1 value and correspond to "15R probability variation big hit", "10R probability variation big hit", "2R probability variation big hit", and "sudden probability variation big hit", respectively. Judgment value (big hit type judgment value) is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C indicate that when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type and a random number for variation pattern type determination. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C includes numerical values (determination values) to be compared with random number (random 2) values for variation pattern type determination, which are normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, A determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of super CA3-3, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2 is set.

  For example, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 9A used when the big hit type is “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”, and the big hit type is “15R probability variation big hit”. 9B is different from the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 9B in the assignment of determination values to the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3.

  As described above, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the big hit type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the big hit type. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, in the case of “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”, the variation pattern type determination If the value of the random number (random 2) is 150 to 251, it can be seen that at least super-reach (super-reach A, super-reach B) is accompanied by variable display.

  In addition, for the super reach big hit, the variation pattern type with pseudo-continuity (variation pattern type including the variation pattern of Super PA3-3 and Super PA3-4) and the variation pattern type without super-continuity (Super PB3-3, Super The variation pattern type may include a variation pattern including a variation pattern of PB3-4. In this case, in both the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A for 10R / 2R probability variation big hit and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B for 15R probability variation big hit, the variation pattern type with super reach and pseudo-ream and super reach In addition, a variation pattern type that does not involve pseudo-continuations is assigned.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C used when the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, for example, when the big hit type such as special CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is other than “suddenly probable big hit”. A determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which no determination value is assigned. Therefore, when control is made to sudden probability variation big hit state in response to the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type becomes “sudden probability variation big hit”, the big hit state by 15R probability variation big hit, 10R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit is achieved. The variation pattern type can be determined differently from the case of control.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D has a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variation display result is a small hit symbol. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9D, when it is determined to be a small hit, the case where the special CA4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type is shown. .

  FIGS. 10A to 10D are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D. Among these, FIG. 10 (A) shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than three. FIG. 10B shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135B used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. FIG. 10C shows a variation pattern for loss used when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (a state from the end of the big hit until the end of the 70th variation display) in the probability variation state. A type determination table 135C is shown. FIG. 10D shows a high probability / low base state in which the gaming state is a probabilistic state (a state from the end of the 70th variation display to the end of the 71st variation display after the big hit) Shows a variation pattern type determination table 135D for loss used in the case of The deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> A to 135 </ b> D have a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variation display result is an outlier symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above.

  As shown in FIGS. 10C and 10D, in this embodiment, even when the probability variation state is present, if the last 71st variation display is performed after the big hit, the previous time is displayed. Compared to the case where the 70th variation display is performed, the variation pattern with super reach is selected more frequently. By doing so, in this embodiment, the expectation for the big hit of the player at the end of the probability variation state is performed by performing the super reach variation display with a high probability in the last variation display where the probability variation state ends. The feeling is heightened. In addition, not only the last 71th variation display, for example, increasing the ratio of super reach from the variation display a predetermined number of times before the probability variation state ends (for example, 5 times before) to the last variation display, etc. Super reach variation display may be performed with high probability over a plurality of variation displays.

  In this embodiment, after the big hit, the high probability state continues until the 71st variation display ends, and the high base state continues until the 70th variation display ends. Thus, in the 71st variation display in the final probability variation state, the case where the high probability / low base state is controlled is shown, but the high base state is continued until the 71st variation display is completed. In the 71st variation display at the end of the probability variation state, the high probability / high base state may be controlled. However, if controlled in this way, in this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D for detachment are selected according to the state of the high probability flag or the high base flag in the variation pattern setting process, as will be described later. (Refer to Steps S95, S96, S100, and S101). However, since the 71st variation display at the end of the probability variation state remains in the high probability / high base state, the state of the flag is confirmed in this way. It becomes impossible to select the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D. Thus, in the case of controlling to the high probability / high base state even in the 71st variation display in the final probability variation state, the values of the high probability count counter and the high base count counter, which will be described later, are confirmed, and the counter value If the remaining is once, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135D is selected. If the counter value is still 2 or more, the variation pattern type determination table 135C for deviation is selected. Good.

  Further, when the ratio of the super reach is increased from the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times before the probability variation state ends (for example, five times before) to the last fluctuation display, for example, a high probability number described later at the end of the big hit Set the counter and the high base number counter to 75 times (for example, set both the high probability number counter and the high base number counter to 75, and the high probability / high base state until 75 times of variable display is completed. The high probability count counter is set to 75 and the high base count counter is set to 70. From the 5th change before the probability change state ends to the last change display, the high probability / low It is also possible to control to the base state.In the case of controlling to the high probability / low base state from the 5th change before the probability change state ends to the last change display. In this case, according to the same control as that shown in this embodiment, the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D may be selected by checking the high probability flag and the high base flag (step S95, S96, S100, S101))) At the start of the variable display, whether or not the value of the high probability count counter and the high base count counter is within a predetermined number (for example, 5) or not (the remaining number of probability variation states) Is within the predetermined number of times), and if it is within the predetermined number (for example, 5), the variation pattern type determination table 135D for detachment with the increased super reach ratio shown in FIG. If the counter value is still larger than a predetermined number (for example, 5), the variation pattern type determination table for detachment shown in FIG. It may be selected to 135C. In addition, the control method in the case where it is configured to increase the ratio of the super reach from the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times before the probability variation state ends (for example, five times before) is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, 71 is set in the high probability count counter in the same manner as in this embodiment, and conversely, 66 is set in the high base count counter. Is controlled to a high probability / low base state, and by confirming whether the value of the high probability count counter is within 5 or less, the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D for loss are selected. May be. Further, the number of fluctuations after the big hit may not be determined based on the count value of the high probability number counter or the high base number counter, but may be determined using another counter. For example, a counter that counts the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game is provided, and whether the count value of the counter is within a predetermined range (for example, 71 to 75 or 66 to 71) is confirmed. It may be determined whether or not the state is between five changes before the end of the state and the last change display, and the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D for loss may be selected (the probability change state is ended). For example, the configuration may be configured in such a manner that the selection ratio of the super reach is increased only once in the last variation display. For example, the counter value for counting the number of variations after the big hit game is 71, for example, In such a case, the shift variation pattern type determination table 135D may be selected. In addition, when the configuration is such that the high-probability / low-base state is controlled from the change display a predetermined number of times before the probability change state ends (for example, five times before) to the end of the last change display. In the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D for detachment may be selected according to the state of the high probability flag or the high base flag (see steps S95, S96, S100, and S101). ).

  In the example shown in FIG. 10, a case where separate variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> B to 135 </ b> D are used for the case where the gaming state is the high base state and the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more is shown. However, the common deviation variation pattern type determination table may be used in the case of the high base state and in the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. In the example shown in FIG. 10C, the common high base deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C is used regardless of the total number of reserved storage, but the high base deviation variation pattern is used. As the type determination table, a plurality of variation pattern determination tables for deviation corresponding to the total number of pending storages (tables with different ratios of determination values) may be used.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the total pending storage number is less than 3 and the total pending storage number is 3 or more. In this example, two types of tables are used, namely, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135B. However, the method of dividing the variation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2) , The deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4... May be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values stored in the total number of pending storages may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0 to 2, for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4, and so on may be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of deviation variation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of reserved storages, but deviation variation pattern type determination is performed according to the first and second reserved memory numbers. A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, a deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared separately for each value of the first reserved memory number may be used (that is, the first reserved memory number). The deviation variation pattern type determination table for 0, for the first reserved memory number, for the first reserved memory number for 2, for the first reserved memory number for three, for the first reserved memory number for four, etc. Each may be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the first reserved memory number 0 to 2, the first reserved memory number 3, the first reserved memory number 4, and so on may be used. Even in this case, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are large (for example, 3 or more), it may be configured such that a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected. . Even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach as a specific variation display pattern.

  Note that “specific performance mode” refers to a variation pattern type or variation pattern that has a high expectation level for at least big hits, such as a fluctuation pattern with super reach, and can give the player a sense of expectation for the big hit. It is. In addition, the “expected degree (reliability) for the big hit” indicates an appearance rate (probability) that a big hit appears when a change display (for example, a change display with super reach) according to the specific production mode is executed. ing. For example, the expectation degree of jackpot when the variable display with super reach is executed is determined as (the rate at which super reach is executed when jackpot is determined) / (when jackpot is determined and lost) Is calculated by calculating the rate at which super reach is performed on both.

  Each of the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, which is non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-. 3, a determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the normal state and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 230 to 251, it can be seen that variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed regardless of the total number of pending storage.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the game and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 1 to 79, it can be seen that the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least without the reach (without the specific effect such as the pseudo ream and the slide effect) regardless of the total number of the pending storage. Due to such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (displacement variation pattern type determination table 135A, 135B) includes at least one of the variation display patterns other than the reach variation display pattern (variation pattern with reach). Regardless of the number of rights (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, combined reserved memory number) stored in the reserved memory means (first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer) for a part, Common determination values (1 to 79 in the examples shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B) are assigned. Note that the “variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern” means, as shown in this embodiment, for example, a variable display result without a reach, without a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slide effect. This is a variation display pattern (variation pattern) that is used when the big hit is not a big hit.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the case where the common big hit variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current gaming state is shown. Depending on whether it is a normal state, you may make it use the variation pattern type determination table for big hits prepared separately, respectively. In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation pattern for shortening variation is determined by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 10B. Although the case where it is configured so that there is a case is shown, the total number of reserved memories (the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number may be used) when the variation pattern of the shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state ) May be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved memory is 3 (or when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is 2, for example), When the variation pattern type of shortening variation is selected by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for loss, and the gaming state is a high base state, the case of 1 or 2 having a smaller total number of pending storage However (or, for example, even when the number of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is smaller 0 or 1), the fluctuation pattern type determination table for shortening is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern of the shortening fluctuation. There may be cases where there are cases.

  FIGS. 11A and 11B are explanatory views showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B determine the fluctuation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the fluctuation pattern type when it is determined that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is one of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 or super CA3-3, and the variation pattern type is specially selected. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that either CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is selected. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and the variation display result of the effect symbol is Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” is included.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11A, as the variation pattern types, normal CA3-1, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and pseudo-continuity are used. A case is shown in which a normal CA 3-2 is classified into a normal CA 3-2 and a super CA 3-3 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach (which may be accompanied by a pseudo-ream). In the example shown in FIG. 11B, as the variation pattern type, a special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and a special CA4- that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach are used. 2 shows a case of classification into two. In FIG. 11B, the variation pattern type may be divided according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect instead of being classified according to the presence / absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4-1 includes a special PG 1-1 and a special PG 2-1 that are fluctuation patterns not accompanied by a specific effect, and the special CA 4-2 includes a special PG 1-2, a special effect PG 1-2, and a special effect. You may comprise so that PG1-3 and special PG2-2 may be included.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is based on the random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the determination result of the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variation display result is “out”. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that designates a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variation display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 9 controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying the effect symbols in a variable manner.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H).

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variation display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variation display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variable pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variation display (variation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol determination designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variation display (variation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  Commands A001 and A002 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). In this embodiment, a big hit start designation command or a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command is used according to the type of big hit. Specifically, in the case of “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, or “2R probability variation big hit”, the big hit start designation command (A001 (H)) is used, and “sudden probability variation big hit” or “small In the case of “hit”, a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start command (A002 (H)) is used. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to transmit a fanfare designation command for suddenly probable big hit start designation in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send a fanfare designation command in the case of a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. Since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round, and the command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for designating round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) for designating round 10. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted, a different designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when ending the first round during the big hit game, a designation command (A201 (H)) after the big winning opening is designated to designate round 1, and when the tenth round during the big hit game is ended. Is sent after a special winning opening opening command (A30A (H)) for designating round 10.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game (a jackpot end designation command: an ending 1 designation command). The big hit end designation command (A301 (H)) is used when the big hit game with “15R probability change big hit”, “10R probability change big hit”, or “2R probability change big hit” is ended. Command A 302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command: ending 2 designation command) that designates the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change big hit game. The game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit an ending designation command for suddenly probable big hit end designation in the case of sudden probable big hit, but not to send an ending designation command in the case of small hit. Also good.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / high base state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state. Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / low base state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a high probability / low base state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning designation command) that designates that the first start winning has been won. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning designation command) for designating that the second starting win has been won. In this embodiment, hereinafter, the first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command.

  The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number designation command) for designating a total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the total pending storage number. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage count subtraction designation command) that designates that the total pending storage count is decremented by one. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a total pending memory count subtraction designation command when subtracting the total pending memory count, but does not use the total pending memory count subtraction designation command. When subtracting the total pending storage number, a total pending storage number designation command for designating the total pending storage number after subtraction may be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which a combined pending storage number designation command for designating the combined pending storage number is transmitted as a command for designating the reserved storage count. It may be configured to transmit a command for designating the increased number of reserved memories. Specifically, when the first reserved memory increases, a first reserved memory number designation command for designating the first reserved memory number is transmitted, and when the second reserved memory increases, the second reserved memory number is designated. The second reserved memory number designation command may be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, a start winning designation command for designating which one of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is won is transmitted as the hold storage information, and the total reserved storage number However, the effect control command transmitted as the hold storage information is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second reserved memory number addition) indicating that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory number decreases, the reserved memory number subtraction designation command (the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or the command indicating that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has decreased) is transmitted. (Second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol design command) that indicates whether or not a big hit, a small win or not, and a big hit type determination result among the winning determination results. is there. The command C6XX (H) is an effect control command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number among the winning determination results. (Variation category command).

  In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing described later (see FIG. 21), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not it is a big hit, a small hit or not, Then, it is determined in which determination value range the random value for determining the variation pattern type falls. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating the big hit or the small hit or a value for designating the type of the big win is set, and control for transmission to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Further, a value for designating a range of a determination value as a determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether the display result is a big hit or a small hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and the type of the big hit, Based on the variation category command, the variation pattern type can be recognized when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined determination value.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, EXT data is set and a symbol designating command is transmitted according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made and the type of the big hit.

  For example, when it is determined that “out of the game” is given in the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designating command (symbol 1 designating command) in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the “15R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 2 designation command) in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that “10R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 3 designation command) in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that “2R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 4 designation command) in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “suddenly probable big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 5 designation command) in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that the “small hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 6 designation command) in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Note that the EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to share data to be read when setting a symbol designating command and when setting a display result specifying command.

  16 and 17 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the variable category command. As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, in this embodiment, which gaming state is displayed, which display result is the display result of the special symbol or effect symbol, the random number for determining the variation pattern type at the time of starting winning A value is set in the EXT data according to whether it is determined that any of the determination values falls within the range, and a variation category command is transmitted.

  For example, if it is determined that the gaming state is in the normal state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79. Determine whether or not. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the non-reach CA2-1 variation pattern type is commonly assigned to the range of determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize at least that the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 based on the reception of the variation category 1 command. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 2 command in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 3 command in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 100 and 169, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 4 command in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 6 command in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 215 and 229, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 8 command in which “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is super CA2-7 based on the reception of the variation category 8 command.

  Note that the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 used to determine which of the above-mentioned variation categories belong are specifically shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B. This is derived by picking up values that can be boundaries of the range of determination values assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table for loss. This is the same for the subsequent variation categories 9 to 12 and 21 to 29, and each variation in the variation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. A threshold value used for category determination is derived by picking up a value that can be a boundary of a range of determination values assigned to the pattern type.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is high probability / high base state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not 1 to 219. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-3), the CPU 56 performs the variation in which “08 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Send category 9 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “09 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 220 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7). Send a variable category 10 command.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is high probability / low base state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not 1 to 79. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA 2-1), the CPU 56 performs variation with “0 A (H)” set in the EXT data. A category 11 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “0B (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA2-7). Send a variable category 12 command.

  Even when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state or high probability / low base state), the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251. Good. By doing so, a common determination value can be assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 regardless of the gaming state. For this reason, when executing the process of step S232 of the effect process at the time of winning to be described later, if it is out of place, the common determination process may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. In this case, the game state determination process in step S226 can be made unnecessary.

  Further, for example, when it is determined at the start winning that it becomes “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”, in step S232 of winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination. It is determined whether or not 1 to 74. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “10 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 21 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “11 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 75 to 149 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A variation category 22 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “12 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3). A variable category 23 command is transmitted.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the “15R probability variation big hit” is reached at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38. Determine whether or not. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “13 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 24 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 39 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). Send a variation category 25 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3-3). A variation category 26 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the winning odds suddenly become a big win at the start winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100. Determine. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “16 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 27 commands are transmitted. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-2), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “17 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 28 commands are transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit is made at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  Note that the total number of pending storage is not always the same when the winning determination is made at the time of starting winning and when the variable display is actually started, so the fluctuation indicated by the winning determination result designation command There may be a case where the pattern type does not coincide with the variation pattern type actually used in the variation display. However, in this embodiment, since at least the non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3 fluctuation pattern types are assigned a common determination value regardless of the total number of pending storages. (See FIGS. 9 and 10), there is no inconsistency between the winning determination result and the variation pattern type of the variation display that is actually executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-7, or super CA3-3, a pre-reading notice effect described later is executed for the variation display determined at the time of winning. May be. Only when it is determined that the variation pattern types of non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3 are the variation category commands shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 (specifically, variation category 1 command, (Variation category 8 command, variation category 23 command, variation category 26 command only) may be transmitted, and the variation category command may not be transmitted in the case of winning determination results of other variation pattern types. Further, if it is determined at the time of winning that it is other than non-reach CA 2-1, super CA 2-7 and super CA 3-3, a variation category command indicating that the variation pattern type cannot be specified may be transmitted. Good.

  The “prefetching notice effect” is a notice effect that is executed before the start of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect. In this embodiment, the production starts from the variation display that is started after the start winning for the variation display to be notified is generated, and a plurality of times before the variation display that is the subject of the notification effect is started. There are those that are continuously executed over the variation display (a pre-reading notice effect in the form of “change in variation mode at the time of symbol variation”, “mode transition”, and “countdown” described later). However, it is not always necessary to execute the notice effect over a plurality of variable displays. For example, the notice effect is performed only once in the variable display before the start of the variable display subject to the notice effect. There may be. Also, for example, the notice effect is started from the change display before the start of the change display targeted for the notice effect, and the notice effect is displayed until the change display immediately before the change display targeted for the notice effect. It may end, or it may perform a notice effect over a variable display that is the subject of the notice effect. In addition, it is not always necessary to continuously execute a plurality of fluctuation displays, and for example, a notice effect may be executed in a plurality of fluctuation displays intermittently every other time or every second time. However, regarding the pre-reading notice effect in the “countdown” mode, which will be described later, if the countdown is only once or intermittent, the effect becomes unnatural, so it can be performed continuously over a plurality of variable displays. desirable.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the aspect of the holding ball that is subject to the notice within the period from the start of the change display that starts after the start winning is generated for the notice that is subject to the advance notice until the change display stops. There is a case where a pre-reading notice effect in a “reserved ball change” mode in which (color or shape) is changed is performed. In this case, the effect itself that changes the mode of “reserved ball change” (the effect that a dwarf or a giant, which will be described later, appears and performs a predetermined operation on the reserved ball) is performed within one fluctuation display period. Will be executed. However, when the mode of the hold display is changed by the effect and becomes the first special display or the second special display described later, the first special display or the second display until the variable display based on the hold display is started. Special display will continue. That is, the effect of changing the mode of “holding ball change” is executed within one fluctuation period, but the pre-reading notice in the mode of “holding ball change” is continued over a plurality of fluctuation displays.

  In this embodiment, regardless of the game state (for example, whether the game is in a high probability state or a high base state, whether or not a big hit game is being played) The winning determination process is executed, the symbol designating command shown in FIG. 15 is always transmitted, and the variation category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is transmitted. Then, based on the received symbol designation command and variation category command, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a big hit or reach is reached before the variation display of the notice target is started. Execute a prefetch notice to give a notice.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. To do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol every time the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b starts the variation display of the special symbol when there is a start prize. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 by the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed as the variation display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol. Image display that can be used in common with the variation display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 8b, and that produces an effect in accordance with the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 when controlling the effect parts such as the device 9.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process (step S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 turns on the first start winning opening 13 when the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 is turned on. If a winning has occurred, or if the second starting port switch 14a for detecting that a game ball has won the second starting winning port 14 is turned on, that is, the starting winning to the second starting winning port 14 If this occurs, start-port switch passage processing is executed (steps S311 and S312). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 enters a state where the special symbol variation display can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 checks the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the combined hold storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variation display time: the time from the start of variation display until the display result is derived and displayed (stopped display)) is the variation time of the special symbol variation display. Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 29), and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed in accordance with the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. In addition, control is performed to transmit the special winning opening open designation command to the production control microcomputer 100, the execution time of the special winning opening open processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S306. To a value corresponding to (6 in this example). The pre-opening process for the big winning opening is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the command for opening a special prize opening is specified, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for designating round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) for designating round 10.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special prize opening opening process, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special prize opening is performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, control is performed to transmit the designation command after the big hit release to the effect control microcomputer 100, and when all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S307 (this In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Also, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a high probability flag or a high base flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for small hits is executed every time the big winning opening during the small hit game is opened. It is also a process to start.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the big prize opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. Update. In addition, when all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control for causing the production control microcomputer 100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the first start port switch 13a is in an ON state (step S1211). If the first start port switch 13a is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to step S1222. If the first start port switch 13a is on, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first reserved memory for counting the first reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 is confirmed (step S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S1222.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1213), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1214). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total reserved memory number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicating “first” is set in the area (step S1215).

  In this embodiment, when the first start opening switch 13a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening 13), data indicating “first” is set, When the second start port switch 14a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the second start winning port 14), data indicating “second” is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first start port switch 13 a is turned on in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area), and the first 2 When the start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating “second”. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved storage, 00 (H) is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

  FIG. 20A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). As shown in FIG. 20A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. FIG. 20A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 20 (A), an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total pending memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area, and the first start winning opening 13 or the first 2. Data indicating “first” or “second” is set in the order of winning based on winning in the starting winning port 14. Accordingly, in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is stored. Note that the reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 20B) (see FIG. 20B). Step S1216). In the process of step S1216, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the start opening switch passage process (at the time of start winning), but is extracted at the start of the variation of the first special symbol. May be. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 20B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 20B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect process for determining in advance when starting a winning a change display result and a changing pattern type when a change based on the detected starting winning is executed (step S1217). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S1218), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1220), and sets the value of the total pending storage number counter to EXT data and sets the total pending storage number designation command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1221).

  Note that by executing the processing of steps S1218 and S1219, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 regardless of the gaming state (whether it is a high probability state, a high base state, or a big hit gaming state). Always sends both the symbol designating command and the variable category command to the production control microcomputer 100 every time the first winning prize opening 13 is won.

  In this embodiment, when the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 occurs by executing the processing of steps S1218 to S1221, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, the first start prize designation A set of four commands, that is, a command and a total pending storage number designation command, are transmitted together in one timer interrupt.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second start port switch 14a is on (step S1222). If the second start port switch 14a is not in the ON state, the process is terminated as it is. If the second start port switch 14a is on, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved memory for counting the second reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 is confirmed (step S1223). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1224), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1225). In addition, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved memory number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) (step S1226).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 20B) (see FIG. 20B). Step S1227). In the process of step S1227, hardware Random random R (big hit determination random number), software random number big hit type determination random number (random 1), variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the start-port switch passing process (at the time of start winning), but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. May be. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect processing (step S1228). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S1229), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1230). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1231), and sets the value of the total pending storage number counter to the EXT data and sets the total pending storage number designation command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1232).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S1229 and S1230, the CPU 56 regardless of the gaming state (whether it is a high probability state, a high base state, or a big hit gaming state). Always sends both the symbol designation command and the variable category command to the production control microcomputer 100 every time the second start winning opening 14 is won.

  In this embodiment, when the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs by executing the processing of steps S1229 to S1232, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, the second start prize designation A set of four commands, that is, a command and a total pending storage number designation command, are transmitted together in one timer interrupt.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing in steps S1217 and S1228. In the winning effect process, the CPU 56 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is confirmed whether they match (step S220). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, determining the type of big hit or changing the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting processing In addition to that, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins at the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, before the change display based on the start winning is started, By executing the winning presentation process, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the big hit or the small win is made, and which judgment value range the value of the big hit type or the variation pattern type determination random number is. By doing so, the variation display result and variation pattern type are predicted in advance before the variation display of the effect symbol is executed, and the effect control microcomputer is based on the determination result at the time of winning as will be described later. A pre-reading notice effect for notifying that it will be a big hit or super reach is displayed during the change display of the effect symbol.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the normal jackpot determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state. High probability / high base state and high probability / It is confirmed whether or not a high probability flag indicating that the low base state is included is set (step S221). If the high probability flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variation displays will be executed after confirming whether or not the state is surely changed in step S221 at the time of the start winning, until the actual display of the variation based on the start winning is actually started. There is. For this reason, the game state has changed (for example, the start of change) from when it is confirmed whether or not it is in the probable variation state at step S221 at the time of starting winning, until when the fluctuation display based on the starting winning is actually started. If the 15R probability variation big hit, the 10R probability variation big hit, the 2R probability variation big hit, or the sudden probability variation big hit occurs before, the normal state changes to the probability variation state. For this reason, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) are not necessarily the same. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the determination at the start winning prize is made based on the game state after the change. Also good.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (N in step S222), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 and FIG. ) And (C) are compared with the small hit determination values to confirm whether or not they match (step S223). In this case, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning effect processing in step S1217 is executed), the CPU 56 determines the small hit determination table (first) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set for the special symbol. Further, when there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning effect processing at step S1228 is executed), the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8C. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 sets EXT data “00 (H)” indicating “out of” in the symbol designation command. Is performed (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process for determining the current gaming state (step S225). In this embodiment, in step S225, the CPU 56 determines whether the gaming state is a high probability state and a high base state (specifically, the high probability flag and the high base flag are set). Whether or not). In addition, after confirming whether or not the high probability state and the high base state are set in step S225 at the time of starting winning, until the display of fluctuation based on the starting winning is actually started, Multiple variable displays may be performed. Therefore, the game state after the start winning is confirmed in step S225 whether or not it is in the high probability state and the high base state until the actual display of variation based on the start winning is actually started. (For example, when a 15R probability variation big hit, a 10R probability variation big hit, a 2R probability variation big hit, or a sudden probability variation big hit occurs before the start of fluctuation may change from a normal state to a probability variation state). Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S225 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) do not necessarily match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the determination at the start winning prize is made based on the game state after the change. Also good.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold for detachment according to the determination result of step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold determination program for performing threshold determination in advance is incorporated, and by determining whether or not the threshold value is larger than the threshold value, the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within any determination value range. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is determined.

  For example, if the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold 219. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 219 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value 219 (that is, 1 to 219). Is determined to set “08 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold 219 (that is, 220 to 251), it is determined that “09 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the high probability / low base state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 79. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 (ie, 1 to 79). Is determined to set “0A (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined that “0B (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  For example, if the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 in step S232 described later. Is determined to set “00 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 89 or less (that is, 80 to 89), it is determined that “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 99 or less (that is, 90 to 99), it is determined that “02 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 169 or less (that is, 100 to 169), it is determined that “03 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined that “04 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold is 214 or less (ie, 200 to 214), it is determined that “05 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold value is 229 or less (that is, when it is 215 to 229), it is determined that “06 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is not less than 229 (that is, 230 to 251), it is determined that “07 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  In the threshold determination example described above, 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 are determined in order from the smallest threshold value. It will never fall within the range below the previous order threshold. That is, after determining whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, when determining whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, it does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 that is equal to or less than the threshold value in the previous order. It is determined whether it is in the range. In this embodiment, the case where the threshold values are determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in order from the smallest value is shown. Conversely, 229, 214, You may determine with 199, 169, 99, 89, and 79. The same applies to the determination using other threshold values shown below.

  Note that the threshold value in the normal state (low probability / low base state) may always be set without determining the gaming state in step S225. Even in such a configuration, the range of determination values is shared by at least the variation pattern type that is “non-reach” and the variation pattern type that is “super-reach”. It can be determined whether or not it is “out of” or “out of super reach”.

  When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y of step S223), the CPU 56 uses the EXT data “05 (H)” indicating “small hit” as a symbol designating command. Is set (step S227).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a threshold for small hits (step S228). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 251 and determines in step S232 described later that the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is equal to or less than the threshold value 251 (1 to 251). It is determined that “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data “18 (H)” is set as it is without performing the threshold determination.

  When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227. Is determined (step S229). In this case, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning effect processing in step S1217 is executed), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type determination table (first 1D) shown in FIG. Using the special symbol 131a, it is determined whether the big hit type is “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit” or “sudden probability variation big hit”. When there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning effect processing at step S1228 is executed), the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 131b is used to determine whether the jackpot type is “15R probability variation jackpot”, “10R probability variation jackpot”, “2R probability variation jackpot” or “sudden probability variation jackpot”.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the symbol designation command (step S230). In this case, when it is determined that “15R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “01 (H)” indicating “15R probability variation big hit” to the symbol designation command. If it is determined that “10R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “02 (H)” indicating “10R probability variation big hit” in the symbol designation command. When it is determined that “2R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “03 (H)” indicating “2R probability variation big hit” in the symbol designation command. If it is determined that “suddenly probable big hit”, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “04 (H)” indicating “suddenly probable big hit” in the symbol designation command.

  And CPU56 sets each threshold value for jackpots according to the jackpot type determined by step S229 (step S231).

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 74 and 149 when determining that “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 (that is, 1 to 74). Is determined to set “10 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is 149 or less (that is, 75 to 149), it is determined that “11 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold value 149 (ie, 150 to 251), it is determined that “12 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines “15R probability variation big hit”, the threshold values 38 and 79 are set. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 38 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 38 (that is, 1 to 38). Is determined to set “13 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined that “14 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined that “15 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Further, for example, if the CPU 56 determines “suddenly promising big hit”, it sets the threshold 100. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold value 100 in step S232 described later, and if it is less than or equal to the threshold value 100 (that is, 1 to 100). Is determined to set “16 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold is not less than 100 (that is, 101 to 251), it is determined that “17 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold value set in steps S226, S228, and S231 and the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 to determine which value of the random number for variation pattern type determination. It is determined whether it falls within the determination value range (step S232).

  In steps S226, S228, and S231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a variation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is set. In step S232, the set variation pattern type is set. A determination table may be used to determine the range of the variation pattern type determination random number and which variation pattern type.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result to the variable category command (step S233). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines “00 (H)” to “0B (H)”, “10” as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 depending on which variation pattern type is determined in step S232. A process of setting any value of (H) ”to“ 18 (H) ”to the EXT data of the variable category command is performed.

  In this embodiment, although the case where it is determined that the big win or the small win is determined in the determination at the time of winning, the range in which the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is uniformly determined is shown. When it is determined that the game is a big hit or a small hit, the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type may not be determined. Then, when a big win or a small win is received, a symbol designating command indicating that the determination at the time of winning is made may be transmitted, and a variation category command comprehensively indicating that the variation pattern type of a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. . For example, although the production control microcomputer 100 does not specifically show which variation pattern type, the variation indicated that it will be one of the big hit variation pattern types. Based on the reception of the category command, a prefetch notice effect described later may be executed.

  22 and 23 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not yet been transmitted, control is performed to send the customer waiting demonstration designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the processing is performed. finish. For example, when the CPU 56 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demonstration request command is repeatedly set based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completed flag is set. Control should be performed so that the demo designation command is not transmitted. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completion flag may be reset when the next special symbol variation display is started.

  In step S51, the CPU 56 does not check the value of the total reserved memory number, but checks whether or not data is set in the first area of the reserved specific area. If it is not set, it may be determined that there is no reserved storage, and the process may proceed to step S51A.

  If the total number of pending storage is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first data among the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 20A) is “first” data. (Step S52). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating “first” (that is, data indicating “second”) (N in step S52), the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol pointer (first Data indicating “second” is set in a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for one special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol (step S53). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating “first” (Y in step S52), the CPU 56 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S54). ).

  By executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, in this embodiment, the first special symbol changes in accordance with the start winning order in which the game balls win the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. Display or variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this embodiment, the first special symbol variation display or the second special symbol variation display is executed in accordance with the start winning order in which the game balls have won the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. Although the case where it is displayed is shown, you may comprise so that a variable display of any one of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol may be performed preferentially. In this case, for example, when the state is shifted to the high base state, it is easy to start winning at the second starting winning port 14 provided with the variable winning ball device 15 and the second reserved memory is easily accumulated. The special symbol variation display may be executed with priority.

  In the case where the display is performed with priority on the variation display of the second special symbol, the jackpot determination random number (random R) is set to the jackpot determination in the low probability state in the winning effect processing shown in FIG. Only the process of comparing with the value may be executed and may not be compared with the jackpot determination value in the high probability state (specifically, only the process of step S220 is executed, and the processes of steps S221 and S222 are performed) You may not do it). With such a configuration, when the display of the variation of the second special symbol is prioritized and executed, between the determination result of the jackpot in the determination at the time of winning and the determination result of the jackpot at the actual start of variation It is possible to prevent the deviation from occurring.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and in the reserved specific area and the first reserved memory buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the reserved specific area and the second reserved memory buffer are shifted. To do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 stores the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1. In addition, the CPU 56 adds the values (values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total reserved storage number = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. Store in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = m−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order. Further, the order in which the values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1-8.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Moreover, CPU56 performs control which transmits a background designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control according to the present game state (step S60). In this case, when the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set and the high base flag indicating the high base state is set, the CPU 56 sets the high probability high base state background. Controls sending specified commands. Further, when only the high probability flag is set and the high base flag is not set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a high probability low base state background designation command. Further, when neither the high probability flag nor the high base flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the address of the command transmission table (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) corresponding to the effect control command is given. Set to pointer. And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when the change of the special symbol is started, the effect control micro is set in the order of the background designation command, the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command for each timer interrupt. It is transmitted to the computer 100. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms elapses, the display result designation command is transmitted after elapse of 4 ms, and further after 4 ms elapses. A command for specifying the total pending storage number subtraction is transmitted. In addition, the symbol variation designation command (the first symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted when the special symbol variation starts, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S310 can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes a jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 reads the jackpot determination random number extracted in step S1216 or step S1227 of the start-port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The big hit determination module compares the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (see FIG. 8) determined in advance with the big hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining that it is a big hit or a small hit if they match. It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), the probability that the game state is a big hit than when the gaming state is non-probability change state (normal state) Is configured to be high. Specifically, a jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the right side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance and the number of jackpot determination values are definitely changed. A normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) set smaller than the hour big hit determination table is provided. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in the state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is a probable change state is determined by whether or not the high probability flag is set. The high probability flag is set when the gaming state shifts to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state ends. Specifically, it is determined to be “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit” or “sudden probability variation big hit”, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Then, after the big hit game is over, it is reset when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (71 in this embodiment).

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) To determine whether or not to make a small hit. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. . If it is determined to be a small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

  If the random R value does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step S75 as it is.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8D. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects a big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select the type corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the big hit type stored in the random number buffer area (“15R probability variable big hit”, “ "10R probability variation big hit", "2R probability variation big hit" or "sudden probability variation big hit") is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 reads out the jackpot type determination random number extracted in step S1216 or step S1227 of the start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer, and determines the jackpot type. Do. Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the rate at which suddenly probable big hits are selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is “15R probability variable big hit”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “10R positive variable big hit”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type. When the big hit type is “2R probability variable big hit”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, “04” is set as the data indicating the big hit type. Is done.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” which is a loss symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, depending on the decision result of the big hit type, one of “1”, “3”, “7”, “9”, which becomes the big hit symbol, is determined as the special symbol stop symbol To do. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “suddenly promising big hit”, “1” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “2R probable big hit” is decided, “3” is designated as a special symbol stop symbol. If “10R probability variation big hit” is decided, “7” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and if “15R probability variation big hit” is decided, “9” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol. . When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown, but the method for determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is as follows. It is not limited to what is shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and when a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on the random number for determining the big hit type, the corresponding jackpot is determined based on the determination result. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. ) To (C)) is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 9D) as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. )) Is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag indicating the high base state is set (step S95). The high base flag is set when the gaming state shifts to the probability changing state, and is reset when the high base state ends. Specifically, it is determined to be “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit”, “2R probability variation big hit” or “sudden probability variation big hit”, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Further, after the big hit game is over, it is reset when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (70 times in this embodiment).

  If the high base flag is not set (N in step S95), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set (step S96). If the high probability flag is not set (N in Step S96), that is, if the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total number of pending storage is 3 or more (Step S97). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S97), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135A for detachment as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. 10A) is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S97), the CPU 56 uses the deviation variation pattern type determination table as a table used to determine one of the plurality of variation pattern types. 135B (see FIG. 10B) is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the high probability flag is set (Y in step S96), that is, if the gaming state is a high probability / low base state, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. As a table used for this purpose, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135D (see FIG. 10D) is selected (step S100). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the high base flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (in this embodiment, the low probability / high base state is controlled). Therefore, if the high base flag is set, a high probability / high base state is established), and the CPU 56 uses the variation for outlier as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation patterns. The pattern type determination table 135C (see FIG. 10C) is selected (step S101). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  In this embodiment, when the processing of steps S95 to S101 is executed, and the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation for loss shown in FIG. The pattern type determination table 135B is selected. Further, when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, the variation pattern type determination table 135C for loss shown in FIG. 10C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S102, which will be described later. If the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process changes in step S105. Short reach variation non-reach PA1-2 is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 12). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, a change display of the shortening variation may be performed. In this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation (see FIG. 10C) used in the high probability / high base state and the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storage ( Although the table is different from that shown in FIG. 10B, a common table may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is a high base state, when the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0 or 1), The change display of the shortening change may not be performed. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S95, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is almost zero. The determination table 135A (see FIG. 10A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer), and performs the processing of steps S92, S94, S98, S99, S100, or S101. By referring to the selected table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S102).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B (see FIG. 11) as tables used to determine the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S102. ), One of the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 12) is selected (step S103). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S103. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S105). When the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to extract the value directly from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S107).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S109).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S95 to S102 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, the variation pattern type determination table for non-reach (including the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 shown in FIG. 10) and the variation pattern type determination table for reach (FIG. 10). Normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6, including a variation pattern type of super CA2-7) are prepared, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables with different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases. In this case, for example, whether the CPU 56 matches the determination value assigned to the common range of the reach determination table in determining whether “super-reach out” or “non-reach out” occurs in the winning effect processing. By determining whether or not, it may be determined in advance whether or not to reach. In addition, considering that the execution ratio of the notice effect is reduced, as shown in this embodiment, the “super-reach out” is performed depending on the variation pattern type without performing the lottery process using the random number for reach determination. It is preferable to pre-determine whether or not “non-reach” will occur and perform a pre-reading notice effect.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the presentation control commands (display result 1 designation to display result 6 designation) (see FIG. 13) in accordance with the determined big hit type, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S118. When the big hit flag is set, if the big hit type is “15R probability variable big hit”, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command (steps S111 and S112). Whether or not it is “15R probability variation big hit” is specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. it can. Further, when the big hit type is “10R probability variation big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 3 designation command (steps S113 and S114). Specifically, whether or not it is “10R probability variation big hit” is determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “02”. it can. Further, when the big hit type is “2R probability variation big hit”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 4 designation command (steps S115 and S116). Specifically, whether or not it is “2R probability variation big hit” is determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “03”. it can. When it is neither “15R-probable big hit”, “10R-probable big hit”, or “2R-probable big hit” (that is, “abrupt-probable big hit”), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command. This is performed (step S117).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S118). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 6 designation command (step S119). When the small hit flag is not set (N in Step S118), that is, when it is out of place, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (Step S120).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S121).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted (step S1121). Whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted is determined by, for example, transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command when transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command in step S1122 described later. It is sufficient to set whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set, and whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set in step S1121. Further, in this case, the set total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is reset by special symbol stop processing or jackpot end processing, which will be described later, when the special symbol variation display is ended or when the big jackpot is ended. do it.

  Next, if the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the total pending storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1122).

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S1125). When the variable time timer times out (step S1126), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the high probability flag indicating the high probability state and the high base flag indicating the high base state if set (step S132). ), Control for transmitting a jackpot start designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S133). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is “15R probability variation jackpot”, “10R probability variation jackpot” or “2R probability variation jackpot”, a jackpot start designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. When the big hit type is sudden probability change big hit, a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) is transmitted. Whether the jackpot type is “15R-probable big hit”, “10R-probable big hit”, “2R-probable big hit” or “suddenly promiscuous big hit” is data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (big hit type (Data stored in the buffer).

  In addition, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the big hit has occurred) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S134). In addition, the number of times of opening the winning prize opening counter (for example, “15R probability variation big hit” is 15 times. “10R probability variation big hit” is 10 times. (In this case, twice.) Is set (step S135). The round time per round in the big hit game is also set. In this case, in the case of sudden probability variation jackpot and 2R probability variation jackpot, although the same two rounds are set, different round times are set. Specifically, in the case of sudden probability change big hit, the round time is set to 0.1 seconds, and in the case of 2R probability change big hit, the round time is set to 29 seconds. Note that 29 seconds is set as the round time even in the case of 15R probability variation big hit or 10R probability variation big hit. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winner opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S136).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set (step S137). When the high probability flag is set (that is, when the probability variation state (high probability / high base state or high probability / low base state)), the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the high probability state is indicated. The value of the high probability count counter is decremented by 1 (step S138). Then, when the value of the high probability count counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the high probability flag (step S140). If the high probability flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S141.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag indicating the high base state is set (step S141). When the high base flag is set (that is, in the case of a high probability / high base state), the value of the high base number counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the high base state is decremented by 1 ( Step S142). Then, when the value of the high base number counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S143), the CPU 56 resets the high base flag (step S144). Then, the process proceeds to step S145. If the high base flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S145 as it is.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S145). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start command (command A002 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S146). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, a time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S147). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S148). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S308) (step S149).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S145), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S150).

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, in the case of “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”, a big hit end designation command (command A301 (H)) is transmitted, and “sudden probability sudden big hit” Is transmitted with a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command (command A302 (H)). Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed in the image display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the processing is ended.

  In step S164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 sets a high probability flag to shift the gaming state to the high probability state (step S166). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 71 times) in a high probability number counter for counting the number of times of display of fluctuation in the high probability state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets the high base flag and shifts the gaming state to the high base state (step S168). In addition, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) in a high base number counter for counting the number of times of change display in the high base state (step S169).

  It should be noted that by executing the processing of steps S166 to S169, the high probability / high base state is transitioned to after the big hit game ends, and the high probability / high base state is maintained until the variable display is terminated 70 times. Then, after the end of the big hit, the transition to the high probability / low base state is made from the end of the 70th variation display to the end of the 71st variation display, and when the 71st variation display ends, the gaming state is in the normal state Return to.

  In this embodiment, the high base flag set in step S168 is also used to determine whether to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 or increase the number of times of opening. In this case, specifically, in the normal symbol process (see step S27), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag is set when the normal symbol variation display result is a hit, If it is set, control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 15 by extending the opening time or increasing the number of times of opening. The high base flag set in step S168 is used to determine whether or not to shorten the special symbol variation time. In addition, in the case of a configuration that can be controlled even in the normal symbol variation state with an increased probability of winning the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol, the high base flag determines whether or not the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is a hit. Also used to determine.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S170).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of special symbol display control processing (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol changing process is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for special symbol variation display for setting the special symbol display control data. Processing for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every time 0.2 seconds elapse. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol display on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the special symbol stop processing is entered), the CPU 56 stops the special symbol stop symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. Processing for setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. After that, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and a drive signal is output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b in accordance with the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The special symbol stop symbols are stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the process of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for the stop symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data is displayed in the display control process of step S22. Based on this, the latest stop symbol is stopped and displayed until the next variable display is started. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 2 or 3 in step S3201 (that is, if either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation process), the special symbol variation display is performed. The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, the display result designation command transmission process also varies in order to prevent a deviation between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. What is necessary is just to comprise so that 1 may subtract a time timer.

  In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag. However, in the special symbol process, the start flag is set at the start of the variation of the special symbol. In addition, an end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. In the special symbol display control process (step S32), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the start flag being set, and based on the end flag being set. Thus, special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol may be set.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) is performed (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process (step S706). In the 4th symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 are selected. The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 13 and FIG. 14) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is. Note that the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

  32 to 35 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 6 designation command) in the RAM. Is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (command A001 (H)) (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) (step S623), the production control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag. (Step S624).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (step S625), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S626). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (step S627), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (step S628).

  If the received effect control command is a power-on specification command (initialization specification command) (step S631), the effect control CPU 101 displays an initial screen on the effect display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. Control is performed (step S632). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (step S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. Display control is performed (step S634), and a power failure recovery flag is set (step S635).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (command A301 (H)) (step S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S642). If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command (step S645), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command reception flag (step S646).

  If the received effect control command is any symbol designating command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 uses the received symbol designating command as the first free winning command storage area formed in the RAM. (Step S652).

  FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the command storage area at the time of starting winning a prize. As shown in FIG. 36, an area (storage areas 1 to 8) corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total pending storage number is secured in the start winning command storage area. In this embodiment, as shown in steps S1218 to S1221 and S1229 to S1232 of the start port switch passing process of FIG. 19, when there is a start winning to the first start winning port 13 or the second start winning port 14 In addition, four commands of a symbol designation command, a variation category command, a start prize designation command (a first start prize designation command or a second start prize designation command), and a combined pending storage number designation command are set in one timer interrupt. Sent by. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36, in each of the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a start prize designation command, and a combined pending storage number designation command can be stored in association with each other. Thus, a storage area is secured.

  In this embodiment, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 stores commands in the first storage area that is vacant in the start winning command storage area in the order received. In this embodiment, the command transmission is performed in the order of the symbol designation command, the variation category command, the start winning designation command, and the total pending storage number designation command within one timer interruption. As shown in FIG. 36, in each of the storage areas 1 to 8, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, a start winning designation command, and a combined pending storage number designation command are stored in this order (in FIG. 36, An example in which commands are stored in the storage areas 1 to 5 is shown).

  In the example shown in FIG. 36, a total pending storage number designation command (7) that designates the total pending memory number 7 in the storage area in which up to seven pending memories have occurred in the previous fluctuation display and the latest command is stored. C207 (H)) is stored, and thereafter, the storage state of the command storage area at the time of the start winning prize is shown in the situation where one hold memory is consumed and the variable display based on the second hold memory is started. .

  In addition, each command stored in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 36 is an effect symbol variation start process which will be described later at the timing at which the effect symbol variation display is started each time the effect symbol variation display is started. In step S8022, the contents stored in the first storage area 1 are deleted and the contents of the start winning command storage area are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 36, when a new effect symbol variation display is started, each command stored in the storage area 1 is deleted and each command stored in the storage area 2 is stored. Each command stored in the storage area 3 is shifted to the storage area 2 and each command stored in the storage area 4 is shifted to the storage area 3 and stored in the storage area 5. Each command is shifted to the storage area 4.

  In addition, in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 36, the storage area 2 shows an example in which the command reception cannot be performed normally and the total pending storage number designation command is missed. For this reason, in the example shown in FIG. 36, in the storage area 2 of the start winning command storage area, the content of the fourth storage area in which the total pending storage number designation command is originally stored is “0000 (H)”. The remaining state is shown.

  Further, in this embodiment, as will be described later, a command at the time of start winning (symbol designation command, variable category command, start winning designation command and total pending storage number stored in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. Based on the designation command), the prefetching notice effect is set in the prefetching notice effect determination process (see step S800A). The command at the time of starting winning (design designation command, variation category command, starting prize designation command and summation) When a missed or inconsistent stored memory number designation command) occurs, the setting of the pre-reading notice effect is limited until the change display of the reserved memory corresponding to the command at the start winning prize is exhausted. In this embodiment, the command received at the start winning prize stored in the start winning command storage area is received during a period during which the setting of the prefetching notice effect is restricted (hereinafter also referred to as the prefetching notice setting restriction period). In addition, as shown in FIG. 36, for the case where the setting process of the pre-reading notice effect is not performed at the timing of receiving the command at the start winning prize, it is not determined that the setting process of the pre-reading notice effect is not performed. Information is set. In the example shown in FIG. 36, for the storage areas 2 to 5 after the storage area 2 where the total pending storage number designation command has been missed, the value of the undetermined information indicates that the pre-reading notice effect setting process has not been performed. 1 ”is set.

  In this embodiment, “restrict the execution of the pre-reading notice effect” means that the pre-reading notice effect is not set at all for the reserved memory corresponding to the start winning that occurred within the pre-reading notice setting restriction period. It includes both the concept of not executing the pre-reading notice effect and the concept of not setting and executing the pre-reading notice effect of some aspects. In this embodiment, as will be described later, it can be executed only in the case of “Super Reach Big Bonus” and “Super Reach Out” with respect to the reserved memory corresponding to the start winning that occurred within the pre-reading notice setting limit period. The pre-reading advance notice of the mode of “countdown” is not set and executed, and the pre-reading notice of the state of change of the “change of the pattern when the pattern changes” or “mode shift” can be executed even in the case of “non-reach” The effects can be set and executed even within the pre-reading notice setting limit period.

  In this embodiment, when a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a startup prize designation command, and a combined pending storage number designation command received when a starting prize is generated are comprehensively expressed, Say. Further, among the commands at the time of starting winning, a starting winning designation command and a combined pending storage number designation command which are commands for designating information capable of recognizing that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has increased, When expressed in a comprehensive manner, it is also called reserved storage information. Also, a symbol designating command which is a command indicating whether or not the big hit or the small win is determined in the winning presentation process at the time of starting winning (see FIG. 21), the determination result of the big hit type, the determination result of the variation pattern type When the variable category command is comprehensively expressed, it is also referred to as a winning determination result designation command or determination result information.

  If the received effect control command is any variation category command (step S653), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation category command in each storage area 1 of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Are stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designating command is stored (step S654). However, if the variation category command, start winning designation command, or total pending storage number designation command is already stored in the storage area where the latest symbol designation command is stored, the variation category command will be included in the current timer interrupt. This means that the symbol designating command to be received has been missed. In that case, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation category command in the first free storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM.

  If the received effect control command is the first start prize designation command (step S655), the effect control CPU 101 uses the received first start prize designation command in each start prize command storage area formed in the RAM. Of the storage areas 1 to 8, the latest symbol designating command and variable category command are stored in the storage area (step S656). However, if the start winning designation command or the combined pending storage number designation command has already been stored in the storage area where the latest symbol designation command or variation category command is stored, the first start within the current timer interrupt This means that both the symbol designation command and the variable category command to be received prior to the winning designation command have been missed. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received first start winning designation command in the first free storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM.

  If the received effect control command is the second start prize designation command (step S657), the effect control CPU 101 uses the received second start prize designation command in each start prize command storage area formed in the RAM. Of the storage areas 1 to 8, the latest symbol designating command and variation category command are stored in the storage area (step S658). However, if the start winning designation command or the total pending storage number designation command has already been stored in the storage area where the latest symbol designation command or variable category command is stored, the second start within the current timer interrupt This means that both the symbol designation command and the variable category command to be received prior to the winning designation command have been missed. In that case, the CPU 101 for effect control stores the received second start winning designation command in the first free storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM.

  If the received production control command is a combined pending storage number designation command (step S659), the production control CPU 101 uses the received aggregate pending storage number designation command for each start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Of the storage areas 1 to 8, the latest symbol designation command, variation category command, and start winning designation command are stored in the storage area (step S660). However, if the total pending storage number designation command is already stored in the storage area where the latest symbol designation command, variation category command, start winning designation command is stored, the total pending memory is stored within the current timer interrupt. This means that all of the symbol designation command, variable category command, and start winning designation command to be received prior to the number designation command have been missed. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received total pending storage number designation command in the first free storage area in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM.

  If the received effect control command is a total pending storage number subtraction designation command (step S661), the effect control CPU 101 erases the first on-hold display in the total on-hold storage display unit 18c and sets the remaining on-hold display to 1. Shifting is performed one by one, and the total pending storage number display in the total pending storage display portion 18c is updated (step S662A). For example, when the first to fifth hold displays on the combined hold storage display unit 18c are lit up, the first hold display is deleted when the combined hold storage number subtraction designation command is received. At the same time, the second hold display is shifted to the first display area, the third hold display is shifted to the second display area, and the fourth display is displayed. The held display that has been displayed is shifted to the third display area, and the held display that has been displayed fifth is shifted to the fourth display area.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 holds the target of the notice of the pre-reading notice effect in the effect mode of “change in holding ball” described later (that is, the first special display or the second special display described later). When the display is erased), and the erased hold display is a first normal display or a second normal display to be described later, a pre-reading notice effect of the “holding ball change” effect mode is performed on the hold display. (I.e., when an effect was made to change the color or shape, but the color or shape did not change, resulting in the first normal display or the second normal display), As a general rule, the pre-reading advance notice execution flag of “change in holding ball” is reset (step S662B).

  Here, in the present embodiment, a pre-reading notice effect in the effect mode of “change in reserved ball” may be performed on a plurality of held balls among the displayed held balls. In this case, even if the reserved ball for which the effect was performed first is erased, if the reserved ball for which the effect was performed later is displayed, the pre-reading notice execution flag for “change of reserved ball” remains set. To do. That is, in the present embodiment, in S662B, when a pre-reading notice effect of the effect mode of “change of reserved ball” is performed (or when performed) for at least one of the reserved balls displayed after erasure, The pre-reading notice execution flag corresponding to “change in holding ball” is set, and the pre-reading notice effect of the “change in holding ball” effect is not performed for all the hold indications displayed after erasure. (And not performed), the pre-reading notice execution flag for “change in reserved ball” is reset.

  If the received effect control command is a customer waiting demonstration designation command (step S663), the effect control CPU 101 performs control to display a predetermined customer waiting demonstration screen on the effect display device 9 (step S664). In addition, the customer waiting demonstration screen is not displayed immediately based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, but after the customer waiting demonstration designation command is received, the customer waits for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). The display of the waiting demonstration screen may be started.

  If the received effect control command is a normal state background designation command (step S666), the effect control CPU 101 uses the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue display color). Background screen) (step S667). In addition, if set, the effect control CPU 101 resets a high probability state flag indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state and a high base state flag indicating that the gaming state is a high base state ( Step S668).

  If the received effect control command is a high probability / high base state background designation command (step S669), the effect control CPU 101 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 according to the high probability / high base state. The screen is changed to a background screen (for example, a background screen with a red display color) (step S670). In addition, the production control CPU 101 sets a high probability state flag and a high base state flag (step S671).

  If the received effect control command is a high probability / low base state background designation command (step S672), the effect control CPU 101 uses the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 as a background screen corresponding to the probability change state (for example, , An orange display color background screen) (step S673). The effect control CPU 101 sets a high probability state flag (step S674) and resets the high base state flag (step S675).

  If the received effect control command is a special winning opening open designation command (step S678), the production control CPU 101 sets a special winning opening open flag (step S679). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received special winning opening open designation command received in the special winning opening open designated command storage area formed in the RAM (step S680). The production control microcomputer 100 recognizes the number of rounds during the big hit game by confirming the special winning opening open designated command stored in the special winning opening open designated command storage area. Can do.

  If the received effect control command is a designation command after opening the big winning opening (step S681), the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag after opening the big winning opening (step S682). Also, the effect control CPU 101 stores the received special winning opening after opening designation command in the designated winning opening after opening special command opening storage area formed in the RAM (step S683).

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S684). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a prefetch notice effect determination process for determining presence or absence of a prefetch notice effect and an effect mode (step S800A).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and the effect symbol variation display is realized, but the control related to the effect symbol variation display synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the change display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. It should be noted that the effect symbol change display synchronized with the first special symbol change and the effect symbol change display synchronized with the second special symbol change may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which representation control process processing is performing the variation display of the representation symbol.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. When the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  38 to 40 are flowcharts showing the pre-reading notice effect determination process (step S800A). In the pre-reading notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not at least one of the commands at the time of start winning is newly received (step S6001). Specifically, whether or not at least one of the symbol designating command, the variable category command, the starting winning designating command, or the combined pending storage number designating command is newly stored in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. Can be confirmed. If no command is newly received, the process is terminated.

  If at least one of the commands at the time of starting winning is newly received, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not a pre-reading notice execution flag other than the pre-reading notice execution flag of “pending ball change” is set. (Step S6002). The pre-reading notice execution flag is set in steps S6014, S6019E, S6029, and S8012, which will be described later. If any pre-reading notice execution flag other than the "preserving ball change" pre-reading notice execution flag is set (Y), the process proceeds to step S6020.

  Note that, by executing the process of step S6002, in this embodiment, the pre-reading notice effect determination process is executed on the condition that no pre-reading notice effect other than the “holding ball change” is executed. Then, after starting the pre-reading notice effect other than the “holding ball change”, since the pre-reading notice execution flag other than the “holding ball change” has already been set, the determination process of the prefetching notice effect is executed again. The pre-reading notice effect is executed in the already determined effect mode. In other words, in the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice effect of “change of reserved ball” is executed, but when no other pre-reading notice effect is executed, a new pre-reading notice effect (including “holding ball change” is included). ) Determination processing can be performed. Therefore, it is also possible to perform a pre-reading notice effect by changing each mode (color or shape) of the plurality of reserved balls displayed. In addition, if a pre-learning pre-announcement effect is performed when a pre-reading notice effect is executed based on the determination result at the time of a “non-reach” prize, the super-reach is switched from the pre-reading notice effect that is being executed. Or a jackpot effect (for example, a reach notice or a jackpot notice) may be executed. It should be noted that a determination process for the presence or absence of the pre-reading notice execution flag other than “change of reserved ball” in step S6002 is not provided, You may make it perform the process after step S6003.

  If the pre-reading advance notice execution flag other than “holding ball change” is not set, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the pre-reading advance notice setting restriction flag indicating that the prefetch advance notice setting restriction period is set. (Step S6003). If the prefetch notice setting restriction flag is set, the process proceeds to step S6020. In other words, during the prefetching notice setting restriction period, the execution of the prefetching notice effect is restricted so as not to proceed to the processing for setting the prefetching notice effect in steps S6004 to S6019F.

  If the pre-reading notice setting restriction flag is not set, the production control CPU 101 confirms the contents of the latest start winning command stored in the start winning command storage area, and the commands at the start winning prize are in order. It is confirmed whether or not all have been received (step S6004).

  Specifically, in this embodiment, four commands of a symbol designating command, a variable category command, a starting winning designating command, and a combined reserved memory number designating command are grouped in one timer interrupt as commands at the time of starting winning a prize. Therefore, the MODE data is “C4 (H)”, “C6 (H)”, “C0 (H)” (or “C1 (H)”) in the start winning command storage area. , And a command “C2 (H)” should be stored (see FIG. 14). Therefore, if any of the MODE data is not stored, the effect control CPU 101 can determine that the command has been missed due to noise or garbled data of the MODE data and the command could not be received correctly. .

  In this embodiment, since the symbol designation command, the variation category command, the start prize designation command, and the combined pending storage number designation command should be received in this order, the MODE data is “ It should be stored in the order of “C4 (H)”, “C6 (H)”, “C0 (H)” (or “C1 (H)”), and “C2 (H)”. Therefore, even if all of these MODE data are stored, the effect control CPU 101 may store “C6 (H)” before “C4 (H)” if the order is different. It can be determined that the command could not be received correctly due to noise or garbled MODE data.

  When it is determined that the received start winning command is not in order or part of the command is missing, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S6023. When it is determined that all the commands at the time of the start winning prize have been received in order, the effect control CPU 101 matches the contents of the latest symbol designation command stored in the start winning prize command storage area and the variable category command. It is confirmed whether or not (step S6005). Specifically, when a symbol 1 designation command (C400 (H)) for designating a deviation as a symbol designation command is stored, the variation category 1 command to the variation category 12 command corresponding to the deviation as the variation category command are stored. One of them should be stored (see FIGS. 15 and 16). Nevertheless, when the variation category 21 command to variation category 29 command (see FIG. 17) corresponding to the big hit, suddenly probable big hit, or small hit is stored, the effect control CPU 101 changes the symbol designation command and the fluctuation. It can be determined that the content of the category command is not consistent and there is a conflict.

  When it is determined that the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command are not consistent, the CPU for effect control 101 proceeds to step S6023. When it is determined that the contents of the symbol designating command and the variation category command are consistent, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the latest start winning designation command stored in the start winning command storage area and the combined pending storage number It is confirmed whether or not the content of the specified command is consistent (step S6006). Specifically, the first start winning designation command for designating that the first winning prize opening 13 has been received and the second starting prize for designating that the second winning prize opening 14 has been given. Even if the specified command is stored, if the total pending storage number indicated by the EXT data of the total pending storage number designation command stored in the start winning command storage area is 0, the effect control The CPU 101 can determine that the contents of the start winning designation command and the combined pending storage number designation command are not consistent and inconsistent.

  In this embodiment, when any one of the determination processes in steps S6004 to S6006 is determined to be N, the process proceeds to step S6023 to shift to the pre-reading notice effect setting limit period. However, this is not the only case. For example, on the condition that any two of the determination processes in steps S6004 to S6006 are determined to be N, the process may proceed to step S6023 to shift to the prefetching notice effect setting limit period. On the condition that it is determined as N in all the determination processes of S6006, the process may proceed to step S6023 to shift to the prefetching notice effect setting limit period.

  Further, it is not always necessary to provide all three determination processes in steps S6004 to S6006 in the program, and the program may be configured to provide only one determination process in steps S6004 to S6006. However, the program may be configured to provide only any two of the determination processes in steps S6004 to S6006.

  If it is determined that the contents of the start winning designation command and the combined pending storage number designation command are not consistent, the CPU 101 for effect control proceeds to step S6023. When it is determined that the contents of the start winning designation command and the combined pending storage number designation command match, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the high probability state flag is set (step S6007). . If the high probability state flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 selects the prefetching notice allocation table A as a table for determining the presence / absence of the prefetching notice effect and the effect mode of the prefetching notice effect (step S6008). If the high probability state flag is set, the production control CPU 101 selects the prefetch notice allocation table B (step S6009).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a prefetching notice effect mode determining random number for determining the effect type of the prefetching notice effect, and extracts the value of the extracted prefetching notice effect mode determination random number based on the received variation category command. Is determined as to which of the determination values included in the prefetching notice allocation table selected in steps S6008 and S6009 is executed, the execution presence / absence of the prefetching notice effect and the production mode are determined (step S6010).

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a prefetching notice allocation table showing distribution of prefetching notice effects. If the current gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 101 for effect control is indicated by the received variable category command using the prefetching notice allocation table A in the normal state shown in FIG. 41A selected in step S6008. Based on the winning pattern determination result of the variation pattern type, an effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect is determined. In this embodiment, when using the pre-reading notice allocation table A, for example, the effect control CPU 101 becomes a non-reach CA2-1 change pattern type with a change category command (that is, reach is a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream). 41 (A), when the winning determination result indicating that “there is a non-reach” (specifically, when the command C600 (H) is received) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 4, it is determined to execute the pre-reading notice effect in any of the effect modes of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol change”, “mode transition”, or “change in reserved ball”.

  Further, for example, when the winning control result indicating that “normal reach is lost” is indicated by the change category command, the effect control CPU 101, as shown in FIG. It is decided to execute the pre-reading notice effect in any of the effect modes of “change in variation mode”, “mode transition”, or “change in holding ball”. In addition, for example, the effect control CPU 101 indicates a winning determination result indicating that the variation category command is a variation pattern type of normal CA3-1 or normal CA3-2 (that is, “normal reach big hit”). 41 (specifically, when a command C610 (H), a command C611 (H), a command C613 (H), or a command C614 (H) is received), as shown in FIG. In addition, it is decided to execute the pre-reading notice effect of any effect mode of “change in variation form at the time of symbol change”, “mode shift”, or “change in reserved ball”.

  In addition, for example, the effect control CPU 101 indicates a winning determination result indicating that the variation pattern type is the super CA2-7 variation pattern type (that is, “super-reaching is lost”) (specifically). Specifically, when command C607 (H) is received), as shown in FIG. 41 (A), “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, “mode shift” or “change in reserved ball” It is determined to execute the pre-reading notice effect of any of the effect modes. In addition, for example, the effect control CPU 101 indicates a winning determination result indicating that the variation category command is a variation pattern type of Super CA3-3 (that is, “super reach jackpot”) (specifically). (In other words, when the command C612 (H) or the command C615 (H) is received), as shown in FIG. 41 (A), “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, “mode transition” , It is determined to execute the pre-reading notice effect of the effect mode of either “countdown” or “reserved ball change”.

  The specific contents of each pre-reading notice effect such as “change in change pattern at the time of symbol change”, “mode shift”, “countdown”, and “change in reserved ball” will be described later.

  If the current gaming state is a probable change state, the effect control CPU 101 uses the pre-reading notice allocation table B in the probable change state shown in FIG. 41 (B) selected in step S6009 to receive the variable category command received. Based on the winning pattern determination result of the variation pattern type indicated by (2), the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect is determined. In this embodiment, when using the pre-reading notice allocation table B, for example, the effect control CPU 101 becomes a non-reach CA2-1 change pattern type by a change category command (that is, reach is a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream). 41 (B), when the winning determination result indicating that “there is a non-reach” (specifically, when the command C60A (H) is received) is indicated. As shown in FIG. 6, no allocation is made to the pre-reading notice effect of any production mode, and it is determined not to execute the pre-reading notice.

  Further, for example, when the winning control result indicating that “normal reach is lost” is indicated by the change category command, the effect control CPU 101, as shown in FIG. It is decided to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the effect mode of “change in variation form” or “change in reserved ball”. In addition, for example, the effect control CPU 101 indicates a winning determination result indicating that the variation category command is a variation pattern type of normal CA3-1 or normal CA3-2 (that is, “normal reach big hit”). (Specifically, when a command C610 (H), a command C611 (H), a command C613 (H), or a command C614 (H) is received) is shown in FIG. In this way, it is determined to execute the pre-reading notice effect of the effect mode of either “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” or “change in reserved ball”.

  In addition, for example, the effect control CPU 101 indicates a winning determination result indicating that the variation pattern type is the super CA2-7 variation pattern type (that is, “super-reaching is lost”) (specifically). Specifically, when the command C609 (H) or the command C60B (H) is received), as shown in FIG. 41B, “change in variation form at the time of symbol variation” or “change in retained ball” It is determined that the pre-reading notice effect of any one of the effect modes is executed. In addition, for example, the effect control CPU 101 indicates a winning determination result indicating that the variation category command is a variation pattern type of Super CA3-3 (that is, “super reach jackpot”) (specifically). Specifically, when the command C612 (H) or the command C615 (H) is received), as shown in FIG. 41 (B), “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, “countdown” or It is decided to execute the pre-reading notice effect of any effect mode of “holding ball change”.

  As shown in FIG. 41, in this embodiment, the variation category command is used to determine whether the variation pattern type is a “non-reach out”, “super reach out”, or “super reach big hit” as a result of determination at the time of winning the variation pattern type. When the result is shown, a prefetch notice effect may be executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 41A and 41B, in this embodiment, the pre-reading notice effect of the “countdown” effect mode is selected only when the winning determination result is “super reach big hit”. Is done. Therefore, when the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the “countdown” effect mode, it is determined that at least the variable display that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is a big hit, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In step S6010, it is desirable that the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the big hit game is being played, and if the big hit game is being played, it is desirable to decide not to forcibly execute the prefetch notice effect. Whether or not the big hit game is in progress, for example, confirms whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is a value (specifically, 4 to 7) indicating the big hit display process to the big hit end effect process. It can be determined by doing. The same applies to steps S6027 and S8010 described later.

  Note that the pre-reading notice effect may be executed even during the big hit game. For example, it is not the timing at which a start win occurs and the command at the time of the start win is received, but in a specific round (for example, 10 rounds) in the big hit game, the symbol designation command stored in the start win command storage area or the fluctuation The category command may be read to determine whether to execute the prefetching notice effect, and the prefetching notice effect may be executed in the specific round. In this case, as the pre-reading notice effect, instead of a continuous aspect effect, for example, a so-called one-notification notification effect may be executed to notify that the big hit is fixed in the variable display after the end of the big hit game. Only the pre-reading notice effect similar to “holding ball change” may be executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is decided to execute the pre-reading notice effect (step S6011). For example, if it is determined not to execute the prefetching notice effect because there is no distribution in the prefetching notice allocation tables A and B, the process proceeds to step S6020.

  When it is determined to execute the pre-reading notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it is determined to execute the pre-reading notice effect of an effect mode other than the “reserved ball change” (step S6012). . If it is determined to execute a pre-reading notice effect other than “holding ball change”, the process proceeds to step S6013.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts all the variation category commands stored in the start winning command storage area and stores them as winning determination results for the previous start winnings based on the extracted variation category commands. It is confirmed whether or not all the variation category commands are variation category 1 commands (command C600 (H), non-reach CA2-1 designation) (step S6013). If all of them are variable category 1 commands, the process proceeds to step S6014. If even one variation category command other than the variation category 1 command is included, the process proceeds to step S6020 without executing the processing of steps S6014 and S6015.

  By executing the processing of step S6013, in this embodiment, the pre-reading notice effect (on the condition that all of the fluctuation displays until the notice of the fluctuation display to be noticed is all “non-reach”). (Excluding “Reserved ball change”). Such a configuration prevents a situation in which the continuity of the pre-reading notice effect is impaired due to the reach effect being interrupted in the middle of the pre-reading notice effect (excluding “change in holding ball”). This also applies to the processing in steps S6024 and S8007 described later. However, among the pre-reading notice effects, the pre-reading notice effect of the “reserved ball change” effect mode, which will be described later, does not cause a problem of the continuity of the effects. Only when it is executed, the process of step S6013 is executed so that the pre-reading notice effect can be executed on the condition that all the fluctuation displays until the notice of fluctuation display is started are all “non-reach”. doing. It should be noted that a determination process is not provided for determining whether or not all the variation displays up to the advance notice target are in the change category 1 in step S6013, and whether or not all the change displays up to the advance notice target are “non-reach”. Instead, the processing after step S6014 may be executed.

  If all commands are variable category 1 commands in step S6013, the CPU 101 for effect control sets a pre-reading notice execution flag indicating that execution of the pre-reading notice effect has been determined according to the effect mode determined in step S6010 (step S6013). S6014). In this case, for example, a pre-reading notice execution flag of “change in change pattern at the time of symbol change” indicating that the determined effect mode is “change in change pattern at the time of symbol change” or the determined effect mode is A "pre-reading notice execution flag" indicating "mode change" indicating "mode change" and a "pre-reading notice execution flag" indicating "countdown" indicating that the determined effect mode is "countdown" are set.

  In this embodiment, a pre-reading notice execution flag for “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol change”, a pre-reading notice execution flag for “mode shift”, a pre-reading notice execution flag for “countdown”, and The pre-reading notice execution flag of “holding ball change” indicating that the effect mode is “holding ball change” is collectively referred to as a pre-reading notice execution flag.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines to execute the prefetch notice effect based on the reception of the variable category 1 command shown in FIG. A confirmation flag indicating that execution of the pre-reading notice effect has been determined based on the determination at the time of winning is set. Further, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines to execute the pre-reading notice effect based on the reception of the variable category command indicating that “normal reach is lost”, the prize is awarded when “normal reach is lost”. A confirmation flag indicating that execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined based on the time determination is set. Further, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines to execute the prefetch notice effect based on the reception of the variable category 21 command or the variable category 24 command shown in FIG. Then, a confirmation flag indicating that execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided based on the determination at the time of winning is set. Further, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines to execute the pre-reading notice effect based on receiving the variable category 8 command, the variable category 10 command, and the variable category 12 command shown in FIG. When “super reach is lost”, a confirmation flag indicating that execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined based on the determination at the time of winning is set. Further, for example, when the CPU 101 for effect control determines to execute the prefetch notice effect based on the reception of the variable category 23 command or the variable category 26 command shown in FIG. Then, a confirmation flag indicating that execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided based on the determination at the time of winning is set.

  In addition, for example, when the confirmation flag is composed of a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), by setting a value that specifies which aspect of production to a predetermined bit of the confirmation flag, It may be possible to specify which production mode is determined. These confirmation flags are reset on condition that the pre-reading notice execution flag set in step S8316 or S662B is reset.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 sets the current total number of pending storages in the variation counter (step S6015), and proceeds to S6020. In this case, the CPU 101 for effect control sets the total pending storage number specified by the latest total pending storage number designation command stored in the start winning command storage area in the variation counter. The variation counter is a counter for counting the number of variation displays that are executed until the variation display that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is started. In this embodiment, if the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined during the change display of the effect symbol and the change counter is set in step S6015 or step S6030 described later, the change is first executed. At the end of the fluctuation display, the value of the fluctuation counter is decremented by 1 (see step S8312), and as a result, the value of the fluctuation counter is changed up to the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display subject to the winning determination. It becomes 0 and the pre-reading notice effect ends. In step S6015 or step S6030 described later, when the variation of the effect symbol is not being displayed, the effect control CPU 101 may set a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the current reserved storage number in the variation counter. desirable. With such a configuration, it is possible to end the pre-reading notice effect until the variation display immediately before the variation display subject to the determination at the time of winning, and the variation display subjected to the determination at the time of winning. It is possible to prevent both the pre-reading notice effect and the super reach effect from being performed in order to make the effect too busy.

  In this embodiment, when the effect of the determined pre-reading notice effect is “change in reserved ball”, NO is determined in S6012, and the process proceeds to S6016. For this reason, when the effect of the determined pre-reading notice effect is “reserved ball change”, step S6015 is not executed and the variation counter is not set. Note that when the pre-reading notice effect of the effect mode of “holding ball change” is determined, the processing of steps S6016 to S6019F, which will be described later, is executed, at the timing when the start winning is generated and the command at the time of starting winning is received. With the start of the variable display started later, the pre-reading notice effect of the change in the reserved ball is started. When the hold display is changed to the special display, the special display is continued until the variable display related to the hold display of the special display is started. In other words, at the timing of starting the variable display of the notice target, the notice target hold display is erased from the sum hold storage display unit 18c based on the reception of the sum hold memory number subtraction designation command (steps S661 to S662B). See), the pre-reading notice will end.

  In the look-ahead notice allocation table shown in FIG. 41, the allocation is performed so that the selection ratio of each effect mode varies depending on the reliability that is a big hit. For example, in order to increase the reliability that is a big hit in the order of “change of the variation form at the time of symbol variation”, “mode transition”, “change of the holding ball” (for example, 20%, 40%, 60% in order) Production modes are allocated (in the case of “countdown”, the big hit is fixed). In addition, the allocation method of each production mode that increases the reliability that is a big hit is not limited to such an order, for example, in the reverse order “change in the holding ball”, “mode transition”, “variation mode at the time of symbol variation” Allocation may be performed so that the reliability that is a big hit becomes higher in the order of "change of". Furthermore, not only in the order of these arrangements, for example, even if the mode of “mode shift” is assigned in the order of arrangement in which the reliability that becomes the biggest jackpot is high, or conversely, the reliability that becomes the biggest jackpot is low. Well, various ways of allocating each production mode are possible.

  Returning to step S6012, when it is confirmed that the CPU 101 for effect control has decided to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the effect mode of “change in holding ball” (NO in step S6012), as shown in steps S6016 to S6019F. In addition, an effect determination process in the pre-reading notice effect of the change in the reserved ball is performed.

(Pre-reading notice effect of change of holding ball)
Here, the pre-reading notice effect of “reserved ball change” in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61. In the present embodiment, there are a plurality (two) of production systems with different notice targets for the pre-reading notice effect of the change in the holding ball. One is a production system that suggests the possibility of jackpot (expected degree of jackpot), and the other is a production system that suggests the possibility of super reach (super reach expectation). As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the jackpot expectation varies depending on the color of the holding ball. If the big hit expectation is low, the color of the holding ball does not change due to the pre-reading notice effect (that is, white for the first hold memory, gray for the second hold memory), and if the big hit expectation is medium The color of the reserved sphere is blue due to the pre-reading notice effect, and the color of the reserved sphere is red according to the pre-reading notice effect if the expectation level for the big hit is high. Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (b), the super reach expectation varies depending on the shape of the holding ball. If the super reach expectation is low, the hold ball does not change (not broken) by the pre-reading notice effect, and if the super reach expectation is high, the hold ball is broken by the pre-read notice effect (further, the letter S appears from the broken hold ball) ).

  In the present embodiment, as an effect when changing the color or shape of the reserved ball, a predetermined character (dwarf or giant) appears, and the displayed reserved ball is painted or displayed with a brush. By performing the effect of dividing the ball with a hammer, the color or shape of the reserved ball is changed. Here, as shown in FIG. 59 (c), when a dwarf appears, the color or shape of the holding sphere hardly changes, and when a giant appears, the color or shape of the holding sphere changes. The production is assigned to make it easier. In addition, when a dwarf appears, the color of the reserved ball is difficult to change (that is, it is difficult to change from white or gray to blue or red), and the shape of the reserved ball is difficult to change (that is, difficult to break). When a giant appears, the color of the reserve sphere is likely to change (that is, easy to change from white or gray to blue or red), and the shape of the reserve sphere is likely to change (that is, crack). The production is allocated so that it is easy.

  The first holding effect (holding sphere color change effect) in this embodiment is a plurality of types of effects (brushes) with different ratios for changing the display mode (color) of the holding ball to the first display mode (no change, blue, red). The effect that the dwarf with the appearance appears has a low rate of changing the color, and the effect that the giant with the brush appears has a high rate of changing the color), and the second holding effect (the holding ball shape changing effect) ) Has multiple types of effects with different ratios to change the display mode (shape) of the holding ball to the second display mode (not broken, break) (the effect of the appearance of a dwarf with a hammer changes shape) The ratio of changing the shape is high, and the effect of the appearance of a giant with a hammer is high.

  FIG. 60 shows an example of a notice effect for changing the reserved ball in the present embodiment. In the example of FIG. 60, three reserved balls are displayed on the combined reserved storage display unit 18c, and the pre-reading notice effect of the change of the reserved ball is performed in a state where the effect symbol is variably displayed. As shown in FIG. 60 (1), a dwarf character 1100 having a brush 1110 and a paint bucket 1120 is displayed on the effect display device 9, and this character 1100 approaches the third reserved ball 1000 from the left. Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (2), the dwarf performs an operation to paint the reserved ball 1000 using the brush 1110 using the paint of the bucket 1120 with the brush 1110. In this example, it is assumed that the white reserved ball 1000 is repainted in red. Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (3), the dwarf character 1100 that has finished painting is left and is no longer displayed on the effect display device 9. In this example, since the white holding ball 1000 has changed to red, the player recognizes that the degree of expectation of the jackpot is high and can play the game with the expectation and interest of the jackpot.

  FIG. 61 shows an example of a notice effect for changing the reserved ball in the present embodiment. In the example of FIG. 61, three reserved balls are displayed on the combined reserved storage display unit 18c, and the pre-reading notice effect of the change of the reserved ball is performed in a state where the effect symbol is variably displayed. As shown in FIG. 61 (1), a giant character 1200 with a hammer 1210 is displayed on the effect display device 9, and this character 1200 approaches the third reserved ball 1000 from the left. Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (2), the giant performs an operation of dividing the holding ball 1000 with the hammer 1210. In this example, the holding ball 1000 is broken, and the letter S indicating super reach appears from the inside. That is, the shape of the hold display changes. Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (3), the giant character who has finished splitting the holding ball leaves and is no longer displayed on the effect display device 9. In this example, since the holding ball 1000 is broken and the holding display is changed to the shape of S, the player recognizes that the degree of super reach expectation is high, and can play a game with the expectation and interest of super reach. . As described above, by providing a plurality of system effects as the pre-reading notice effect in the “reserved ball change” mode, the player can be interested.

  In the present embodiment, a dwarf or giant character display process is performed so as not to hide the reserved ball displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c. The dwarf has a small area in the image displayed on the effect display device 9, and the giant has a large size. Moreover, the color attached to the dwarf has high transparency, and the giant has low transparency. Furthermore, the characters of the dwarf and the giant have contrasting features, such as the dwarf moving fast and the giant moving slowly.

  Next, the effect determination process shown in steps S6016 to S6019F will be described. In step S6016, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the latest start winning designation command stored in the start winning command storage area is the first start winning designation command. If the first start winning designation command is stored, the production control CPU 101 increases the first normal display by one as the hold display in the total hold storage display unit 18c (step S6017A).

  If the latest start winning designation command is not the first start winning designation command (that is, if the second start winning designation command is stored), the production control CPU 101 holds the sum in the total hold storage display unit 18c. As the display, the second normal display is increased by one (step S6017B). As described above, in the present embodiment, even when it is determined to perform the pre-reading advance notice of the effect of “change in reserved ball”, the first normal display or the second normal display is increased (for example, a diagram to be described later). 54 (2)).

  After step S6017A or step S6017B, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether to perform an effect of changing the color of the reserved sphere or an effect of changing the shape of the reserved sphere for the pre-reading notice of the effect mode of “change in reserved ball”. Determine (step S6018A). For example, in step S6018A, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect system for determining the effect system (whether “color change” or “shape change”) when performing the pre-reading notice effect of “holding ball change”. Random numbers are extracted at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of receiving a command at one of the start winning prizes). It ’s a good idea to decide.

  In this embodiment, when “color change” is determined, the display mode (color in this example) of the reserved sphere is changed as shown in FIG. 62A, and when “shape change” is determined, As shown in 62 (b), the display mode (the shape in this example) of the reserved ball is changed. Then, as will be described later, as shown in FIG. 63, as a first holding effect executed for the holding ball when the color of the holding ball is changed, an operation in which a dwarf or giant paints the holding ball with a brush as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 64, as a second holding effect that is performed on the holding ball when the shape of the holding ball is changed, as shown in FIG. There is an effect to perform. That is, when the display mode (color) of the hold display (holding ball) is changed to the first display mode (no change, blue, red) based on the decision to execute the first notice effect (color change). On the basis of the determination that the first hold effect (the effect shown in FIG. 63) is executed on the hold display (hold ball) and the second notice effect (shape change) is executed, When the display mode (shape) is changed to the second display mode (not broken or broken), the second hold effect (effect of FIG. 64) is executed for the hold display (holding ball).

  Here, in this embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, in both the first holding effect and the second holding effect, a dwarf or giant character appears and Immediately after performing a predetermined operation (painting or splitting), the display mode of the reserved ball changes (color change or shape change). That is, an example is shown in which the first hold effect or the second hold effect and the timing at which the display mode of the hold ball changes are continuous. However, the timing of the change of the first holding effect or the second holding effect and the holding ball may not be continuous. For example, the dwarf or the giant performs a predetermined operation on the holding ball, and the dwarf or the giant The hold ball may change after disappearing from the screen, that is, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the first hold effect or the second hold effect.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, as demonstrated using FIG.60 and FIG.61, in both a 1st holding | maintenance effect and a 2nd holding | maintenance effect, a dwarf or a giant character appears, On the other hand, an example in which the display mode of the reserved sphere is changed by performing a predetermined operation (painting or dividing) on the reserved sphere after approaching. As the first hold effect and the second hold effect, for example, a non-contact type effect in which a character moves around the reserved ball to be notified may be performed, and the reserved ball to be notified is displayed. It is also possible to perform an effect that indicates a position where the character is present (for example, the character displayed at a predetermined position points to the retaining ball without deforming toward the retaining ball without approaching the retaining ball). Alternatively, the character may temporarily hide the reserved ball to be notified, and the display mode may be changed when the reserved ball appears again. Further, the first hold effect and the second hold effect are not limited to the approach to the reserved ball to be notified and the predetermined operation to the reserved ball, for example, the appearance of a character, the reserved ball to be notified However, the display mode of the reserved ball may be changed with the appearance of the character.

(Determination of the color of the holding ball)
When “color change” is determined as the production system in step S6018A (Y), the production control CPU 101 determines the color of the reserved ball after the pre-reading notice effect of the reserved ball change based on the random X ( Step S6018B). As described above, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a value from a predetermined counter when receiving any start winning command from the game control microcomputer 560, and sets the extracted value as a random X value. It is said. In this embodiment, random X is any value from 1 to 100.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 101, based on the sorting table at the time of color change determination shown in FIG. 62 (a), the color of the reserved ball after undergoing the pre-reading notice effect of the reserved ball change (that is, after the appearance of the character). To decide. Here, the effect control CPU 101 receives a symbol designation command (for example, C401 (H), C402 (H), or C403 (H)) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 in the case of 2R, 10R, or 15R probability variation big hit. ) Is selected, a selection value table (the upper part of FIG. 62 (a)) in which the color of the reserved ball is blue or red with high probability is selected, and a symbol designation command (for example, C400 (H)) other than the above is selected. When it is received, a table of determination values (the lower row in FIG. 62 (a)) in which the color of the reserved ball does not change with high probability is selected. 62 and the tables shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, which will be described later, are stored in a ROM accessible to the effect control CPU 101.

  In this example, when the effect control CPU 101 receives a symbol designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 in the case of a 2R, 10R, or 15R probability variable jackpot that is a so-called real winning big hit, a random X If the value is in the range of 1-5, the color of the reserved sphere is not changed. If it is in the range of 6-30, the color of the reserved sphere is blue. If it is in the range of 31-100, the color of the reserved sphere is red. And Therefore, the color of the reserved ball after the appearance of the character does not change with a probability of 5%, changes to blue with a probability of 25%, and changes to red with a probability of 70%. On the other hand, when the CPU 101 for effect control receives a symbol designation command other than the above, if the random X value is in the range of 1 to 96, the color of the reserved ball is not changed, and is in the range of 97 to 99. The color of the holding sphere is blue, and if it is 100, the color of the holding sphere is red. Therefore, the color of the reserved ball after the appearance of the character does not change with a probability of 96%, changes to blue with a probability of 3%, and changes to red with a probability of 1%.

  Thus, when a symbol designating command indicating a 2R, 10R, or 15R probability varying jackpot that is a big hit with a real ball is received, the color of the reserved ball changes to red or blue with a high probability, and a symbol designating command other than the above Is received, the color of the holding ball is not changed with high probability. Therefore, the player must know the degree of expectation of a big jackpot with real play depending on whether the color of the holding ball changes after the appearance of the character and what color it changes, and play the game with interest. Can do.

  When determining the color of the reserved sphere in step S6018B, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the reserved sphere having a higher degree of expectation than the determined color is displayed (or whether it is displayed) (step S6018C). ). Here, the effect control CPU 101 stores a reservation ball display processing table (for example, see FIGS. 65 and 66 described later) in the RAM. The table is displayed in the display area corresponding to the display area (display area 1, display area 2,..., Display area 8 from the left of the screen) of each reserved sphere in the total hold storage display unit 18c. Display mode (first normal display, second normal display, first special display (blue), second special display (blue), first special display (red), second special display (red), second 1 special display (S), 2nd special display (S), missing mode, or non-display), a hold indicating whether or not a hold ball change effect has been executed for the hold ball displayed in the display area The ball change effect flag and the effect number of the reserved ball change effect executed or executed for the hold ball displayed in the display area are stored.

  As shown in FIG. 63, this effect number is assigned corresponding to the color change of the reserved ball. In this example, the effect number A0X has no color change of the reserved ball, and the effect number A1X has the color of the reserved ball set to blue. The change and effect number A2X is an effect that changes the color of the reserved ball to red. Therefore, in step S6018C, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the reserved sphere display processing table in the RAM to determine whether or not the reserved sphere having a higher degree of expectation than the determined color in step S6018B is displayed (or displayed). Or not). For example, when the determined color is “no change”, if the production number A1X (corresponding to blue) or A2X (corresponding to red) is stored in the reserved ball display processing table, YES is determined in S6018C. For example, when the determination color is “blue” and the production number A2X (corresponding to red) is stored in the reserved ball display processing table, YES is determined in S6018C. If it is determined YES in S6018C, the process is terminated as it is. As described above, when a prefetching notice effect with a high degree of expectation is performed, a prefetching notice effect with a lower degree of expectation is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming annoyed by frequent prefetching notices, and to prevent the interest of the game from being lost due to prefetching notices with low expectations.

(Determination of color change production)
When it is confirmed in step S6018C that the reserved sphere having a higher degree of expectation than the determined color is not displayed (and not displayed) (N), the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect based on random Y (step S6018C). S6018D). As described above, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a value from a predetermined counter when receiving any start winning command from the game control microcomputer 560, and sets the extracted value as a random Y value. It is said. In the present embodiment, random Y is any value from 1 to 100.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect number based on the effect distribution table at the time of color determination shown in FIG. Here, when the effect control CPU 101 receives the symbol designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 in the case of 2R, 10R, or 15R probability variation big hit, it selects the table on the left side shown in FIG. When a symbol designation command other than is received, the table on the right side shown in FIG. 63 (“other than left”) is selected.

  In this example, when the determined color is “no change” and the effect control CPU 101 receives a symbol designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 in the case of 2R, 10R, or 15R probability variation big hit. If the random Y value is in the range of 1-50, the effect number A01 is selected, if it is in the range of 51-90, the effect number A02 is selected, and if it is in the range of 91-100, the effect number A03 is selected. . On the other hand, when the determined color is “no change” and the effect control CPU 101 receives a symbol designation command other than the above, if the random Y value is in the range of 1 to 60, the effect number A01 is selected. If the range is 61 to 95, the production number A02 is selected. If the range is 96 to 100, the production number A03 is selected. Here, the production numbers A01 and A02 are productions in which only the dwarf appears, and these appear with a high probability of 90% (left table) or 95% (right table) when the determined color is “no change”. On the other hand, the effect number A03 is an effect in which only the giant appears, and this appears only with a low probability of 10% (left table) or 5% (right table) in the case of “no change”. Therefore, when the “no change” effect is performed, the probability that only a dwarf appears is set to be extremely high.

  Further, in this example, when the determined color is “blue” and the effect control CPU 101 receives a symbol designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 in the case of 2R, 10R, or 15R probability variation big hit. Selects the production number A11 if the random Y value is in the range of 1-40, selects the production number A12 if it is in the range of 41-80, and selects the production number A13 if it is in the range of 81-100. To do. On the other hand, when the determined color is “blue” and the effect control CPU 101 receives a symbol designation command other than the above, if the random Y value is in the range of 1 to 35, the effect number A11 is selected, If it is in the range of 36 to 70, the production number A12 is selected, and if it is in the range of 71 to 100, the production number A13 is selected. Here, the effect number A11 is an effect in which only the giant appears, and this appears with a probability of 40% (left table) or 35% (right table) when the determined color is blue. On the other hand, in the production number A12, after the dwarf appears, the dwarf paints the holding ball, but the color of the holding ball does not change, then the dwarf returns, the giant appears, and the giant appears on the holding ball. The color is painted, the reserved ball turns blue, and the giant returns. This appears with a probability of 40% (left table) or 35% (right table) when the decision color is blue. Further, the production number A13 is an effect that after the dwarf appears, the dwarf returns, then the giant appears, the reserved ball is colored, the reserved ball changes to blue, and the giant returns. This appears with a probability of 20% (left table) or 30% (right table) when the decision color is blue. Here, in the production numbers A12 and A13, a dwarf with low initial expectation of the change in the reserved ball appears, and the color of the reserved ball does not change by the dwarf, but after that a giant appears and changes the color of the reserved ball We are performing up production. By preparing such a step-up effect, the player is interested in whether or not a giant who has a high expectation of change will appear after the appearance of the dwarf, even if the color of the reserved ball does not change. You can see it. In addition, the player can be interested by the effect of increasing the big hit expectation level step by step.

  Further, in this example, when the determined color is “red” and the effect control CPU 101 receives a symbol designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 in the case of 2R, 10R, or 15R probability variation big hit. If the random Y value is in the range of 1-30, select the effect number A21, if it is in the range of 31-50, select the effect number A22, and if it is in the range of 51-90, select the effect number A23. And if it is the range of 91-100, production number A24 is selected. On the other hand, when the determined color is “red” and the effect control CPU 101 receives a symbol designation command other than the above, if the random Y value is in the range of 1 to 30, the effect number A21 is selected. If it is in the range of 31 to 60, the effect number A22 is selected, if it is in the range of 61 to 99, the effect number A23 is selected, and if it is 100, A24 is selected. In the production number A21, after the dwarf appears, the dwarf colors the reserved ball and the reserved ball turns blue, then the dwarf returns, the giant appears, and the giant changes color to the reserved ball. It is the effect that the painted ball changes to red and the giant returns. This is a step-up effect that appears with a probability of 30% (left table and right table) when the determined color is red.

  Here, in the production of production number A22, a dwarf appears, and the target holding ball is divided by a hammer, but the holding ball does not break, the dwarf returns, and then a giant appears, The effect is that the sphere is colored and the holding ball turns red and the giant returns. That is, although the color change is determined, an effect as if changing the shape is performed, and then an effect that causes the color change is performed. In this way, by performing an effect that spans multiple systems (super reach expectation and jackpot expectation), the player cannot finally know which system of the effect will be performed until the effect ends, Can be interested in. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a dwarf or giant with a brush first appears in all the effects (AXX) shown in FIG. 63 except for the effect of A22.

  In this example, only the dwarf appears and the color of the holding ball changes is only A24, and the appearance rate is 10% (left table) or the determination color is “red”. 1% (right table). In other words, when only the dwarf appears, the expectation that the color of the reserved ball will change is low, and when the giant appears, the performance will be distributed so that the expected value that the color of the reserved ball will change is high. It has been broken. However, in the effect (A24) in which only the dwarf appears and changes the color of the reserved sphere, the color of the reserved sphere changes to red. In addition, when a symbol designation command other than 2R, 10R, or 15R probability variation big hit is received, when the determined color is “red”, the distribution is performed so that the production of A24 appears only with a very low probability of 1%. Has been done. That is, the color of the holding ball is hardly changed only by the dwarf, but if the color is changed, the big hit expectation is extremely high. That is, even when a dwarf appears, the player can see the performance with an interest in whether or not the color of the holding ball changes.

  When the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect number in step S6018D, in step S6019E, a pre-reading advance notice execution flag of “holding ball change” is set, and in step S6019F, the reserved ball change effect is executed in the reservation ball display processing table. After setting the flag, the process ends. Here, the reserved ball change effect execution flag is set for each of the display area 1 to the display area 8 as shown in FIGS. 65 and 66 described later. In this embodiment, the reserved ball change effect flag is increased in S6017A or S6017B. The reserved ball change effect execution flag in the display area corresponding to is set (set to 1). In the table shown in FIG. 63, it is assumed that the time required for the effect (reserved ball change effect time) is also stored in association with each effect number.

(Determination of the shape of the holding ball)
When “shape change” is determined as the effect system in step S6018A (N), the effect control CPU 101 determines the shape of the reserved ball after the pre-reading notice effect of the change of the reserved ball based on the random X ( Step S6019B). As described above, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a value from a predetermined counter when receiving any start winning command from the game control microcomputer 560, and sets the extracted value as a random X value. It is said. In this embodiment, random X is any value from 1 to 100.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 101, based on the distribution table at the time of the shape change determination shown in FIG. To decide. Here, the effect control CPU 101 transmits the change category commands (for example, C607 (H), C609 (H), C60B (H), C612 (H), and the like) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 in the case of super reach. C615 (H)) is received, a table of judgment values (the upper part of FIG. 62 (b)) in which the shape of the holding ball changes (breaks) with high probability is selected, and from the game control microcomputer 560 in the case of normal reach. When a transmitted variable category command (for example, C610 (H), C611 (H), C613 (H), and C614 (H)) is received, the shape of the holding ball changes (breaks) with a medium probability. Select a value table (middle of FIG. 62 (b)) and receive a variable category command (for example, C600 (H)) other than the above. The time was, the shape of the hold ball (not crack) does not change with high probability to select the judgment value table (FIG. 62 (b) bottom).

  In this example, when the production control CPU 101 receives a variable category command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 in the case of super reach, if the random X value is in the range of 1 to 5, the shape of the holding ball If the range is 6 to 100, the shape of the holding ball is changed (the appearance character breaks the holding ball and makes the character S appear). Accordingly, the shape of the holding ball after the appearance of the character does not change with a probability of 5%, but changes (breaks) with a probability of 95%. Further, when the production control CPU 101 receives a variable category command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 in the case of normal reach, the shape of the holding ball is changed if the value of the random X is in the range of 1 to 75. If it is in the range of 76-100, the shape of the holding ball is changed. Accordingly, the shape of the holding ball after the appearance of the character does not change with a probability of 75%, but changes (breaks) with a probability of 25%. Further, when a variable category command other than the above is received, the shape of the reserved sphere is not changed if the value of random X is in the range of 1 to 99, and the shape of the reserved sphere is changed if it is 100. Therefore, the shape of the holding ball after the appearance of the character does not change with a probability of 99%, but changes (breaks) with a probability of 1%.

  In this way, when a variable category command indicating super reach is received, the shape of the holding sphere changes with high probability, and when a variable category command other than the above is received, the shape of the holding sphere does not change with high probability. It has become. In particular, when a variable category command that does not match either the super reach or the normal reach is received (the lower part of FIG. 62 (b)), the distribution of the production is performed so that the shape of the reserved ball changes only with a very low probability (1%). Has been done. Therefore, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of super reach according to whether or not the shape of the reserved ball changes after the appearance of the character, and can play the game with interest.

  When the CPU 101 for effect control determines the shape of the holding ball (not to be broken or broken) in step S6019B, whether or not the holding ball having a shape with a higher degree of expectation than the determined shape is displayed (or whether it is displayed). Is confirmed (step S6019C). As described above, the effect control CPU 101 stores a storage ball display processing table (for example, see FIGS. 65 and 66 described later) in the RAM. In the table, the display is made in the display area corresponding to the display area (display area 1, display area 2,..., Display area 8 from the left of the screen) of each reserved sphere in the total storage storage display unit 18c. Sphere display mode (first normal display, second normal display, first special display (blue), second special display (blue), first special display (red), second special display (red), first special display Display (S), second special display (S), missed aspect, or non-display), and the reserved ball change effect indicating whether or not the reserved ball change effect has been executed for the reserved ball displayed in the display area The flag and the effect number of the reserved ball change effect executed or executed for the reserved ball displayed in the display area are stored.

  As shown in FIG. 64, this production number is assigned in accordance with the change in the shape of the reserved ball. In this example, the production number B0X has no shape change (not broken), and the production number B1X has the reserved ball. It is an effect with shape change (breaking). Accordingly, in step S6019C, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the reserved ball display processing table in the RAM to check whether or not the reserved ball having a shape with a higher expectation than the determined shape in step S6019B is displayed. be able to. For example, in the case where the determined shape is “not broken” and the production number B1X (corresponding to breaking) is stored in the reserved ball display processing table, YES is determined in S6019C. If it is determined YES in S6019C, the process is terminated as it is. As described above, when a prefetching notice effect with a high degree of expectation is performed, a prefetching notice effect with a lower degree of expectation is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming annoyed by frequent prefetching notices, and to prevent the interest of the game from being lost due to prefetching notices with low expectations.

(Determination of shape change production)
In step S6019C, when it is confirmed that the reserved ball having a shape with a higher expectation than the determined shape is not displayed (and not displayed) (N), the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect based on the random Y (step S6019D). As described above, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a value from a predetermined counter when receiving any start winning command from the game control microcomputer 560, and sets the extracted value as a random Y value. It is said. In the present embodiment, random Y is any value from 1 to 100.

  In the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect number based on the effect distribution table at the time of shape determination shown in FIG. When the variable category command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 in the case of super reach is received, the table on the left side shown in FIG. 64 (“in the case of super reach”) is selected, and in the case of normal reach, the game control micro When a variable category command transmitted from the computer 560 is received, the central table shown in FIG. 64 (in the case of normal reach) is selected. When a variable category command other than the above is received, the right table shown in FIG. ("Other than the left") is selected.

  In this example, when the determined shape is “not broken” and the effect control CPU 101 receives a variable category command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 in the case of super reach, the value of the random Y is If the range is 1 to 40, the production number B01 is selected. If the range is 41 to 80, the production number B02 is selected. If the range is 81 to 90, the production number B03 is selected, and the range of 91 to 100 is selected. If so, the production number B04 is selected. In addition, when the determined shape is “not broken” and the production control CPU 101 receives a variation category command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 in the case of normal reach, the value of the random Y is 1 to 45. Effect number B01 is selected if it is in the range of 46-85, effect number B02 is selected if it is in the range of 46-85, effect number B03 is selected if it is in the range of 86-95, and if it is in the range of 96-100. The production number B04 is selected. Furthermore, when a variable category command other than the above is received, if the value of random Y is in the range of 1-50, the effect number B01 is selected, and if it is in the range of 51-90, the effect number B02 is selected. If it is in the range of 95, the effect number B03 is selected, and if it is in the range of 96 to 100, the effect number B04 is selected. Here, the production numbers B01 and B02 are productions in which only a dwarf appears, and these are 80% (left table), 85% (middle table), or 90% (right table) when the determined shape is “not broken”. ) With a high probability. On the other hand, production numbers B03 and B04 are productions in which only giants appear, and these are 20% (left table), 15% (middle table), or 10% (right table) when the determined shape is “not broken”. Appears only with a low probability of. Therefore, when the production “not broken” is performed, the probability that only a dwarf appears is set to be extremely high.

  In this example, when the determined shape is “break” and the effect control CPU 101 receives a variable category command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 in the case of super reach, the random Y value If the range is 1-30, the production number B11 is selected. If the range is 31-50, the production number B12 is selected. If the range is 51-90, the production number B13 is selected. If it is within the range, the production number B14 is selected. In addition, when the determined shape is “break” and the production control CPU 101 receives a variation category command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 in the case of normal reach, the random Y value is 1 to 40. If it is within the range, the effect number B11 is selected. If it is within the range of 41 to 70, the effect number B12 is selected. If it is within the range of 71 to 99, the effect number B13 is selected. If it is 100, the effect number B14 is selected. To do. Further, when a variable category command other than the above is received, if the value of random Y is in the range of 1 to 35, the effect number B11 is selected, and if it is in the range of 36 to 70, the effect number B12 is selected. If it is in the range of 99, the production number B13 is selected, and if it is 100, the production number B14 is selected. Here, the effect number B13 is an effect in which only the giant appears, and this appears with a probability of 40% (left table) or 29% (middle table and right table) when the determined shape is “break”. On the other hand, in the production number B11, after the dwarf appears, the dwarf performs an operation of dividing the holding ball with a hammer, but the holding ball does not break, and then the dwarf returns, the giant appears, and the giant It is an effect that the action of dividing with a hammer is performed, the holding ball breaks, the letter S appears, and the giant returns. This appears with a probability of 30% (left table), 40% (middle table), or 35% (right table) when the determined shape is “break”. Here, the play number B11 is a step-up effect in which a dwarf with a low expected degree of change in the reserved ball initially appears and the shape of the held ball does not change by the dwarf, but a giant appears and changes the shape of the held ball thereafter. It is carried out. By preparing such a step-up effect, the player is interested in whether or not a giant with a high expectation of change will appear after the appearance of the dwarf, even if the shape of the holding ball does not change. You can see it. In addition, the player can be interested by the effect of increasing the degree of expectation of super reach step by step.

  Here, in the production of production number B12, a dwarf appears, and the target holding ball is painted with a brush, but the color of the holding ball does not change, the dwarf returns, and then the giant appears. Then, the reserved ball is divided with a hammer, and the giant returns. In other words, even if the shape change is determined, an effect as if the color is changed is performed, and then an effect that causes the shape change is performed. In this way, by performing an effect that spans multiple systems (big hit expectation and super reach expectation), the player cannot finally know which system of the effect will be performed until the effect ends. Can be interested in. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that a dwarf or giant with a hammer first appears in all the effects (BXX) shown in FIG. 64 except for the effect of B12.

  In this example, only the dwarf appears and the effect of changing the shape of the holding ball is only B14, and the appearance rate is 10% (left table) or when the determined shape is “break” 1% (middle table and right table). In other words, when only the dwarf appears, the expectation that the shape of the holding ball changes is low, and when the giant appears, the performance is distributed so that the expectation that the shape of the holding ball changes will be high. It has been broken. However, in the effect (B14) in which only the dwarf appears and changes the shape of the holding ball, the holding ball is broken, and when the variable category command other than super reach is received, the determined shape is “break” The distribution is performed so that the production of B14 appears only with a very low probability of 1%. That is, the shape of the holding ball is rarely changed only by a dwarf, but if the shape is changed, the big hit expectation is extremely high. That is, even when a dwarf appears, the player can see the production with interest as to whether or not the shape of the holding ball changes.

  When the effect control CPU 101 determines the effect number in step S6019D, in step S6019E, it sets a pre-reading notice execution flag of “holding ball change”, and in step S6019F, in the corresponding display area in the holding ball display processing table. After the reserved ball change effect execution flag is set, the process is terminated. Here, the reserved ball change effect execution flag is set for each of the display area 1 to the display area 8 as shown in FIGS. 65 and 66 described later. In this embodiment, the reserved ball change effect flag is increased in S6017A or S6017B. The reserved ball change effect execution flag in the display area corresponding to is set (set to 1). In the table shown in FIG. 64, it is assumed that the time required for the effect is also stored in association with each effect number.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 occurs, and in S6010, the pre-reading of the effect mode of “change in reserved ball” Even if it is determined to execute the notice effect, in S6017A or S6017B, a process of increasing the first normal display or the second normal display is performed once. Then, as shown in FIG. 44, with the start of the next fluctuation, a pre-reading notice effect in the effect mode of “change in reserved ball” is executed for the increased first normal display or second normal display.

  Next, the case where the process moves to B in the process shown in FIG. 38 will be described. In step S6020, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the latest start winning designation command stored in the start winning command storage area is the first start winning designation command. If the first start winning designation command is stored, the production control CPU 101 increases the first normal display by one as the hold display in the total hold storage display unit 18c (step S6021).

  If the latest start winning designation command is not the first start winning designation command (that is, if the second start winning designation command is stored), the production control CPU 101 holds the sum in the total hold storage display unit 18c. As a display, the second normal display is increased by one (step S6022).

  Next, the case where the process moves to C in the process shown in FIG. 38 will be described. If the process proceeds to step S6023, it is a case where any of the commands at the time of the start winning is missed or mismatched and the command at the time of the start winning cannot be received normally. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the latest command stored in the start winning command storage area, and at least a command other than the start winning designation command (that is, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the total pending storage number). It is confirmed whether or not a (designated command) has been received (step S6023). Specifically, the missing command in the storage area storing the latest command in the start winning command storage area is only the start winning designation command (first start winning designation command or second start winning designation command). Yes, if the design designation command, the variation category command, and the combined pending storage number designation command other than that are stored in order, and the contents of the design designation command and the variation category command are also consistent, at least other than the start winning designation command Since three commands (design designation command, variation category command, and total pending storage number designation command) can be received, there is a possibility that a certain level of credibility can be secured. If any command other than the start winning designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S6031.

  When it is determined that at least a command other than the start winning designation command is received, the effect control CPU 101 extracts all the variation category commands stored in the start winning command storage area, and extracts each extracted variation category. Based on the command, it is determined whether or not all of the variable category commands stored as the determination result at the time of winning for the previous start winning are the variable category 1 command (command C600 (H). Confirmation is made (step S6024). If all of them are variable category 1 commands, the process proceeds to step S6025. If even one variation category command other than the variation category 1 command is included, the process proceeds to step S6031 without executing the processing of steps S6025 to S6030.

  If all of them are variable category 1 commands in step S6024, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the high probability state flag is set (step S6025). If the high probability state flag is set, the process proceeds to step S6031. If the high probability state flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 selects the prefetching notice allocation table C as a table for determining the presence / absence of the prefetching notice effect and the effect mode of the prefetching notice effect (step S6026).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a prefetching notice effect mode determining random number for determining the effect type of the prefetching notice effect, and extracts the value of the extracted prefetching notice effect mode determination random number based on the received variation category command. Is determined as to which of the determination values included in the prefetching notice allocation table selected in step S6026 matches the prefetching notice effect execution state and the production mode (step S6027).

  In step S6027, the effect control CPU 101 uses the pre-reading notice allocation table C at the time of abnormal command reception shown in FIG. Based on the determination result at the time of winning a prize, an effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect is determined. In this embodiment, when using the pre-reading notice allocation table C, for example, the effect control CPU 101 becomes a change pattern type of non-reach CA 2-1 by a change category command (that is, reach is a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream). 41 (C) only when the winning determination result indicating that “there is a non-reach” (specifically, when the command C600 (H) is received) is indicated. As shown in Fig. 4, it is decided to execute a pre-reading notice effect of any one of the effect modes of "change of the change pattern at the time of symbol change" or "mode shift", and "normal reach loss", "normal reach big hit", "super When it is “reach out” or “super reach big hit”, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed. In other words, in this embodiment, if any of the commands at the time of starting winning a prize cannot be received normally, it is possible to execute “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” or “execution of non-reach” or Only the pre-reading notice effect of the “mode shift” effect mode (so-called “gaze pre-reading notice effect”) can be executed, and the execution frequency of the pre-reading notice effect is prevented from being lowered more than necessary. It is not executed only in the case of “non-reach out”, but for example, in the case of “normal reach out”, “normal reach big hit”, “super reach out” or “super reach big hit”, a look-ahead preview The allocation of the notice allocation table C may be performed so as to be executable. By doing so, when the pre-reading notice effect of the effect mode of “change of pattern at the time of symbol change” or “mode transition” is executed, it is not necessarily determined that it is “non-reach”. can do.

  In this embodiment, even if any command at the time of the start winning prize is not received normally, if a command other than the start winning designation command is received, only the so-called GAS pre-reading notice effect is received. Although the case where it is configured to be executable is shown, the processing of steps S6023 to S6030 is not executed, and if any of the start winning commands cannot be received normally, setting and execution of the pre-reading notice effect You may comprise so that it may not perform at all. In particular, it is specified by a command that any one of the commands at the time of starting winning (design designation command, variation category command, starting winning designation command, combined pending storage number designation command) could not be received normally. Since it is considered that the credibility of the information is low, it is most preferable that the prefetching notice effect of all the production modes is not executed during the prefetching notice setting restriction period (the processing in steps S8006 to S8014 described later is not performed). Is desirable).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute the prefetch notice effect (step S6028). For example, if it is determined not to execute the prefetching notice effect because there is no distribution in the prefetching notice allocation table C, the process proceeds to step S6031.

  When it is determined to execute the prefetching notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 sets a prefetching notice execution flag indicating that execution of the prefetching notice effect has been decided according to the effect mode determined in step S6027. (Step S6029).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 sets the current total pending storage number in the fluctuation counter (step S6030). In this case, the CPU 101 for effect control sets the total pending storage number specified by the latest total pending storage number designation command stored in the start winning command storage area in the variation counter. Then, control goes to a step S6032.

  In step S6031, the effect control CPU 101 sets the undetermined information in the storage area for the latest command in the start winning command storage area (step S6031). Specifically, in FIG. 36, the value of the undetermined information in the storage area storing the latest command is set to “1”.

  In step S6032, the CPU 101 for effect control differs from any of the first normal display, the second normal display, the first special display, and the second special display for all the hold displays displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c. In addition to changing to the spill mode, the hold display of the spill mode is increased by one. In this embodiment, the production control CPU 101 changes all the on-hold displays displayed on the total on-hold storage display unit 18c to green on-hold balls and increases the green on-hold ball by one. Note that the hold display in the missed mode is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the hold display may be changed to a color other than green (for example, yellow), and the shape of the hold display is changed. (For example, the hold display may be changed to a triangle display or the like).

  In this embodiment, when a command is missed or inconsistent at the time of a start winning prize is shown, all pending displays displayed on the total pending storage display unit 18c are changed. Only the hold display for the hold memory that has been lost or inconsistent is displayed in a drop-off manner, and the first normal display, the second normal display, the first special display, and the second special display are displayed for the previous hold display. It may be continued. In addition, after a command is missed or inconsistent, during the prefetch notice setting limit period, a pending display may be displayed in a missed manner for a pending storage that has occurred, or the normal first normal display Or the second normal display.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 sets a prefetch notice setting restriction flag (step S6033), and starts a prefetch notice setting restriction period.

  In this embodiment, when a pre-reading notice effect other than “change in reserved ball” is already being executed (see Y in step S6002), the process proceeds to step S6020, and commands in steps S6004 and subsequent steps are missed. Although the case where no inconsistency is determined is shown, even if a pre-reading notice effect other than “change in holding ball” is being executed, processing similar to that in steps S6004 to S6006 is executed to cause a command to be missed or inconsistent. If it is determined whether or not a command is missed or inconsistent, processing similar to step S6033 is executed to set the prefetching advance setting restriction flag, and the prefetching advance setting restriction You may make it start a period. Alternatively, the same processing as that in step S6032 may be executed to change all the hold displays displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c to a missing form.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted even when the power failure is restored (see step S44). However, as shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the variation pattern command has been received, the transition to the production symbol variation start processing is started and the variation display of the production symbol is started. Therefore, if the display result designation command is received without receiving the variation pattern command, the variation of the representation symbol The display will not start.

  43 and 44 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not the prefetch notice setting restriction flag is set (step S8000). If the prefetching advance notice setting restriction flag is not set (that is, not during the prefetching advance notice setting restriction period), the process proceeds to step S8015.

  If the pre-reading notice setting restriction flag is set (that is, during the pre-fetching notice setting restriction period), the production control CPU 101 displays the contents of the command at the start winning prize stored in the start winning command storage area. Confirmation is made (step S8001). Then, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not all the storage areas 1 to 8 in which the commands for the start winning prize are stored are in a storage state in which all the commands for the start winning prize are received in order. (Step S8002).

  Specifically, in this embodiment, four commands of a symbol designating command, a variable category command, a starting winning designating command, and a combined reserved memory number designating command are grouped in one timer interrupt as commands at the time of starting winning a prize. Therefore, if commands are stored in all the storage areas 1 to 8 in the start winning command storage area, the MODE data is “C4 (H)”, “C6 (H)”, The commands “C0 (H)” (or “C1 (H)”) and “C2 (H)” should be stored (see FIG. 14). Therefore, if any of the MODE data is not stored, the effect control CPU 101 still has a storage area in a storage state in which a command is lost due to noise or garbled data of the MODE data. , It can be determined that there is still a storage area in the storage state in which the command could not be received correctly.

  Further, in this embodiment, since the design designation command, the variation category command, the start prize designation command, and the combined pending storage number designation command should be received in this order, all the storage areas 1 to 1 in the start prize command storage area 8, if the command is stored, the MODE data is “C4 (H)”, “C6 (H)”, “C0 (H)” (or “C1 (H)”), and “C2 (H)”. Are stored in the order of "." Therefore, even if all of these MODE data are stored, the effect control CPU 101 may store “C6 (H)” before “C4 (H)” if the order is different. In other words, it can be determined that there is still a storage area in a storage state in which the command could not be received correctly due to noise or garbled MODE data.

  If the received storage start area for which it is determined that the command at the time of the start winning prize is not in order or is partially missing still remains, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8015. When it is determined that all the storage areas 1 to 8 are in a storage state where all the commands at the time of starting winning are received in order, the effect control CPU 101 is stored in the command storing area at the starting winning prize. In all the storage areas 1 to 8, it is confirmed whether or not the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command are consistent (step S8003). Specifically, when a symbol 1 designation command (C400 (H)) for designating a deviation as a symbol designation command is stored, the variation category 1 command to the variation category 12 command corresponding to the deviation as the variation category command are stored. One of them should be stored (see FIGS. 15 and 16). Nevertheless, when the variation category 21 command to variation category 29 command (see FIG. 17) corresponding to the big hit, suddenly probable big hit, or small hit is stored, the effect control CPU 101 changes the symbol designation command and the fluctuation. It can be determined that there is still a storage area in the storage state in which the content of the category command is not consistent and there is a contradiction.

  If it is determined that there is still a storage area in the storage state where the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command do not match, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8015. When it is determined that all the storage areas 1 to 8 are in a storage state in which the contents of the symbol designation command and the variation category command are consistent, the effect control CPU 101 stores the command in the start winning prize command storage area. In all the storage areas 1-8, it is confirmed whether or not the contents of the start winning designation command and the total pending storage number designation command are consistent (step S8004). Specifically, the first start winning designation command for designating that the first winning prize opening 13 has been received and the second starting prize for designating that the second winning prize opening 14 has been given. Even if the specified command is stored, if the total pending storage number indicated by the EXT data of the total pending storage number designation command stored in the start winning command storage area is 0, the effect control The CPU 101 can determine that the contents of the start winning designation command and the total pending storage number designation command are not consistent and there is still a storage area in a storage state having a contradiction.

  If it is determined that there is still a storage area in the storage state in which the contents of the start winning designation command and the combined pending storage number designation command are not consistent, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8015. In the case where it is determined that the contents of the start winning designation command and the total pending storage number designation command are consistent in all the storage areas 1 to 8, the production control CPU 101 restricts the pre-reading advance notice setting. The flag is reset (step S8005). That is, since all the storage areas 1 to 8 in the start winning command storage area are in a storage state in which the start winning command has been normally received, the command that triggered the start of the pre-reading notice setting limit period It is determined that the pending storage that has been missed or inconsistent has been consumed, the prefetching advance notice setting restriction flag is reset, and the prefetching advance notice setting restriction period ends.

  In this embodiment, the pre-reading notice setting restriction flag is reset at the timing when the variable display is started when the pending storage where the command is missed or inconsistency is consumed, and the prefetching notice setting restriction period is set. This is not limited to this timing. For example, the pre-reading notice setting limit period ends at the timing when the variable display is terminated when the pending memory that has been missed or inconsistent is exhausted. You may make it do. In this case, for example, the same process as steps S8000 to S8005 may be performed in the effect symbol variation stop process to be described later, the prefetching advance notice setting restriction flag may be reset, and the prefetching advance notice setting restriction period may be terminated.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not there is any of the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area where the value of the undetermined information is set to “1” (step S8006). ). If there is one for which the value of the undetermined information is set to “1” (that is, if there is a pre-reading notice effect setting process that has not been executed in the pending storage that occurred during the prefetching notice setting restriction period) The process proceeds to step S8007. If there is no information in which the value of the undetermined information is set to “1”, the process proceeds to step S8015.

  In this embodiment, if there are a plurality of storage areas in which the value of the undetermined information is set to “1” in the start winning command storage area, the most recently stored storage (mostly The processing of steps S8007 to S8013 is performed for the command at the time of starting winning for (holding memory corresponding to the last winning winning), and the setting process of the prefetching notice effect for the holding memory generated during the prefetching notice setting restriction period Shall be performed retroactively. For all commands stored in a plurality of storage areas in which the value of the undetermined information is set to “1”, the processes of steps S8007 to S8013 can be performed to set the pre-reading notice effect retroactively. You may make it determine whether it exists.

  If there is one for which the value of the undetermined information is set to “1”, the production control CPU 101 extracts all the variable category commands from the storage area in which the commands are stored before the undetermined storage area. Then, based on each extracted variation category command, all the variation category commands stored as winning determination results for the start winnings up to the previous storage area that has not been determined are all variation category 1 commands (command C600 (H)). Whether or not non-reach CA2-1 is specified) is confirmed (step S8007). If all of them are variable category 1 commands, the process proceeds to step S8008. If even one variation category command other than the variation category 1 command is included, the process proceeds to step S8014 without executing the processing of steps S8008 to S8013.

  If all of them are variable category 1 commands in step S8007, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the high probability state flag is set (step S8008). If the high probability state flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8014. If the high probability state flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 selects the prefetching notice allocation table D as a table for determining the presence / absence of the prefetching notice effect and the effect mode of the prefetching notice effect (step S8009).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 extracts a prefetching notice effect mode determining random number for determining the effect type of the prefetching notice effect, and extracts the value of the extracted prefetching notice effect mode determination random number based on the received variation category command. Is determined as to which of the determination values included in the prefetching notice allocation table selected in step S8009 matches the prefetching notice effect execution state and the production mode (step S8010).

  In step S8010, the production control CPU 101 uses the prefetching notice allocation table D at the time of releasing the prefetching notice setting restriction shown in FIG. 41D selected in step S8009, and the variation pattern type indicated by the received variation category command. Based on the determination result at the time of winning, the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect is determined. In this embodiment, when using the pre-reading notice allocation table D, for example, the effect control CPU 101 uses the change category command to change to the non-reach CA2-1 change pattern type (that is, reach is a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream). (When the command C600 (H) is received) or when the variable category command is used to indicate “normal reach”. When the winning determination result indicating “out of” is indicated, the variation category command indicates that the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1 or normal CA3-2 (that is, “normal reach big hit”). When a winning determination result is indicated (specifically, command C610 (H), command C611 (H), When receiving a command C613 (H) or command C614 (H)), and a winning category indicating that the variation category command is a variation pattern type of super CA2-7 (that is, “super reach is off”). When the determination result is shown (specifically, when the command C607 (H) is received), the variation category command indicates the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3 (ie, “super reach big hit”). When the winning determination result indicating that the command is received (specifically, when the command C612 (H) or the command C615 (H) is received), as shown in FIG. It is determined to execute the pre-reading notice effect of the effect mode of either “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” or “mode shift”.

  In addition, for example, regarding the pre-reading notice effect of the “pending ball change” effect mode, if it is executed retroactively with respect to the undetermined holding memory at the time of releasing the pre-reading notice setting restriction period, the total hold memory display unit 18c is displayed. The hold display already displayed as the first normal display or the second normal display is changed from the middle to the first special display or the second special display, and an unnatural hold display is executed. Become. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41D, in this embodiment, the prefetching notice allocation table D at the time of releasing the prefetching notice setting restriction is assigned to the prefetching notice effect of the “holding ball change” effect mode. Is not performed, and the pre-reading notice effect of the effect mode of “change in reserved ball” is not retroactively executed.

  Note that, for example, the pre-reading notice effect of the “countdown” effect mode is a pre-reading effect that counts down in a continuous manner over a plurality of variable displays, and is stored in an undetermined pending storage when the pre-reading notice setting limit period is canceled. On the other hand, if it is executed retroactively, an unnatural effect such that the countdown starts from a change display in the middle is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 41 (D), in this embodiment, the prefetching notice allocation table D at the time of releasing the prefetching notice setting restriction is allocated to the prefetching notice effect of the “countdown” effect mode. The pre-reading notice effect of the “countdown” effect mode is not retroactively executed. That is, regarding the pre-reading notice effect of the continuous effect mode, in order to prevent the effect from becoming unnatural, it is not retroactively executed when the pre-reading notice setting restriction period is canceled. In this embodiment, the “continuous effect” executed in a continuous manner over a plurality of variable displays corresponds to the pre-reading notice effect of the “countdown” effect mode.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not it has been decided to execute the prefetch notice effect (step S8011). For example, if it is determined not to execute the prefetching notice effect because there is no distribution in the prefetching notice allocation table D, the process proceeds to step S8014.

  When it is determined to execute the pre-reading notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 sets a pre-reading notice execution flag indicating that the pre-reading notice effect has been determined according to the effect mode determined in step S8010. (Step S8012).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 receives a set of commands at the time of start winning (symbol designation command, variable category command) received before the command to be determined for the pre-reading notice effect and stored in the start winning command storage area. , The number of start winning designation commands and the combination pending storage number designation command) is identified, and the identified number (that is, the number of variation displays up to the previous one of the variation display to be notified) is set in the variation counter. (Step S8013).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the values of the undetermined information in all the storage areas 1 to 8 in the start winning command storage area to “0” (step S8014).

  In this embodiment, a case has been shown in which a pre-reading advance notice setting is configured to be executable and can be set retroactively for pending storage that has not been determined when the pre-reading notice setting restriction period is canceled. However, the pre-reading notice effect may not be set and executed retroactively with respect to the undetermined hold storage. In this case, specifically, after the process of step S8005 is executed, the process proceeds to step S8015 as it is, and the processes of steps S8006 to S8014 are not executed. In this case, it is not necessary to provide a storage area for setting the undetermined information in each of the storage areas 1 to 8 in the start winning command storage area.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8015). Next, the CPU 101 for effect control displays the display result (stop) of the effect symbol in accordance with the variation pattern command read in step S8015 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step S8016). That is, by the execution control CPU 101 executing the process of step S8016, the display result of the variation display of the identification information (the stop of the representation symbol) according to the variation display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variation display pattern determination means. A display result determining means for determining (design) is realized. If the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the chance stop symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) is used as the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream in step S8016. The combination of the jackpot symbol that is not reachable and the symbol that is shifted by one symbol) is also determined. In addition, when it is determined in step S8016 that the production control CPU 101 executes the continuous production of the production mode of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, the so-called chance eye symbol is used as the stop symbol of the production symbol. (For example, a combination of symbols that are not reachable, such as “223” and “445”, but that is not one reach and one symbol is shifted). The effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect stop symbols in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8016, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 45, when the received display result designation command indicates “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit” (the received display result designation command designates display result 2). In the case of a command, a display result 3 designation command, or a display result 4 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols in which the three symbols are the same as the stop symbol. It should be noted that the determination ratio of the stop symbol may be varied depending on whether it is “15R probability variation big hit”, “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”. For example, in the case of “15R probability variation big hit”, the ratio of determining the combination of production symbols in which the three symbols are the same odd number is increased, and in the case of “10R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”. You may make it raise the ratio which determines the combination of the production | presentation symbol in which 3 symbols were equal in the same even number design.

  Further, when the received display result designation command indicates “suddenly probable big hit” or “small hit” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 5 designation command or a display result 6 designation command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as the stop symbol. In the case of “out of” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  In addition, as for the effect symbols, a stop symbol reminiscent of a big hit (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right are all the same symbols) is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that recalls a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the reserved ball display processing table and checks whether or not the reserved ball change effect execution flag corresponding to any of the display areas is set (step S8017A). If the reserved ball change effect execution flag corresponding to any display area is not set (N), in step S8017D to be described later, the pre-reading notice effect of the effect mode of “holding ball change” is not set as the effect mode of the notice effect. . When a plurality of reserved ball change effect execution flags are set, it is assumed that the reserved ball change effect is preferentially executed from the previously set one (that is, the priority is the display areas 1 and 2). , 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8).

  On the other hand, when the reserved ball change effect execution flag corresponding to one of the display areas is set in step S8017A (Y), in step S8017B, the effect control CPU 101 refers to the reserved ball display processing table, and An effect number corresponding to the display area (display area where the reserved ball change effect execution flag is set) is specified, and whether or not the time required for the effect is less than the change time recognized based on the change pattern command. Confirm. In step S8017B, when it is determined that the time required for the production (holding ball change production time) is less than the fluctuation time (Y), in step S8017D described later, the production mode of the “holding ball change” is produced as the production mode of the notice production. Set prefetch notice effect.

  Here, when it is determined in step S8017B that the time required for the production (holding ball change production time) is equal to or longer than the variation time (N), in step S8017C, a process for carrying the reserved ball change production to the next variation is performed. . In the present embodiment, in step S8017D, which will be described later, the pre-reading notice effect of the “holding ball change” effect mode is not set as the effect mode of the notice effect. Further, in S8317, which will be described later, the reserved ball change effect execution flag is left set without being reset.

  In step S8017D, the effect control CPU 101 performs a notice effect (a notice effect other than the pre-reading notice effect. For example, a step-up notice effect, a mini-character notice effect, a movable object notice effect, an effect, or the like in the effect display device 9 during the variation display of the effect symbol. The notice effect setting process for determining whether or not to execute the blade accessory notice effect and setting the effect aspect of the notice effect is executed. Further, as described above, when it is determined in step S8017B that the time required for the production (holding ball change production time) is less than the fluctuation time (Y), the effect mode of “holding ball change” is provided as the production mode of the notice effect. Set prefetch notice effect.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the prefetching notice effect and other notice effects when executing the variation pattern, the prefetch notice effect, and other notice effects (step S8018). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S8019).

  FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variation display time (variation time) of the variation display of the effect symbol. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect design in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 46 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  The effect control CPU 101 is determined to execute the pre-reading notice effect and other notice effects, and a pre-reading notice execution flag and other notice execution flags (for example, a holding ball change effect execution flag) are set. If yes, a process table corresponding to the pre-reading notice effect or other notice effects is selected in step S8018. Here, if the pre-reading notice effect of the “holding ball change” effect mode is set in step S8017D, the process table corresponding to the pre-reading notice effect of the “holding ball change” effect mode is selected in step S8017D, and step S8017D. When the pre-reading notice effect of the “holding ball change” effect mode is not set, the process table corresponding to the pre-reading notice effect of the “holding ball change” effect mode is not selected in S8018.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  In addition, the CPU 101 for effect control, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), effects device (effect display device 9 as an effect component, effect component as an effect component) The control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as a production component is executed (step S8020). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27. Further, for example, when executing a pseudo-ream effect or a notice effect, the movable member 78 is moved by driving the motor 86, or the effect blades 79a and 79b are moved by driving the motor 87. Is done.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect pattern CPU 101 so as to display the effect pattern change display by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S8021). Next, the production control CPU 101 uses a start winning command (design designation command, variable category command, start winning designation command, and so on) stored in the first storage area (storage area 1) of the start winning command storage area. (Total pending storage number designation command) is deleted, and the content of the command storage area at the start winning prize is shifted (step S8022).

  In this embodiment, there is a case where the prefetching notice effect is configured to be restartable from the next fluctuation display after digesting the fluctuation display that caused the command miss and inconsistency and caused the prefetching notice setting restriction period. Although, for example, the shift process of step S8022 is executed after it is determined as Y in step S811 of the variation pattern command reception waiting process, a command is missed or an inconsistency causes a prefetching notice setting limit period. The pre-reading notice effect may be configured to be restartable from the changed display. In this case, for example, if the change display that caused the missed-out command or inconsistency and caused the pre-reading notice setting restriction period is “non-reach”, it caused the pre-reading notice setting restriction period. A pre-reading notice effect may be executed in the variable display.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8023).

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation in-process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the change time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S8105). Further, for example, when executing a pseudo-ream effect or a notice effect, the movable member 78 is moved by driving the motor 86, or the effect blades 79a and 79b are moved by driving the motor 87. Is done.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether any pre-reading notice execution flag is set (step S8106). If any of the pre-reading notice execution flag is set, the CPU 101 for effect control “changes the variation mode at the time of symbol change” according to the effect mode determined in the pre-reading notice effect mode determination process in steps S6010, S6027, and S8010. ”,“ Mode transition ”,“ countdown ”, or“ reserved ball change ”is performed to control to execute the pre-reading notice effect (step S8108). However, even if the “preserving ball change” pre-reading notice execution flag is set, it is confirmed in step S8017A that the holding ball change effect execution flag is not set (N), or step S8017C. In step S8017D, the pre-reading notice effect of the “pending ball change” effect mode is not set in step S8017D, and the pre-reading of the “pending ball change” effect mode is performed in step S8018. Since the process table corresponding to the notice effect is not selected, the prefetch notice effect is not executed in the effect mode of “reserved ball change”. In addition, when it is determined to execute a pre-reading notice effect (however, a pre-reading notice effect of an effect mode other than “change in holding ball”), specifically, a predetermined time after the start of the change of the effect symbol At the timing when elapses, the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the corresponding effect mode. On the other hand, if it is decided to execute the pre-reading notice effect of the “holding ball change” effect mode, specifically, the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the corresponding effect mode at the timing immediately after the start of the change of the effect pattern. Shall be. When the prefetching notice effect is executed, it is determined as Y in step S8106 at the timing of executing the prefetching notice effect, and the process of step S8108 is executed. Then, it is determined to be Y repeatedly in step S8106 until the prefetch notice effect is finished, and the process of step S8108 is executed.

  If the variation time timer has timed out (step S8111), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) (step S8112).

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that a stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when a big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Accordingly, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, and therefore the processing of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed. Instead, the process proceeds to step S8305.

  When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (offset symbol, jackpot symbol) (step S8302). When neither the big winning symbol nor the small winning symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, when the lost symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8311.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S8304) and receives the big hit start designation command. It is checked whether a big hit start designation command reception flag indicating that a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set or not (step S8305). . When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306), and responds to the fanfare effect. A process table is selected (step S8307). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) According to the data 1, the movable member control data 1), the production device (the production display device 9 as the production component, various lamps as the production component, the speaker 27 as the production component, and the movable member 78 as the production component and production. The blades 79a and 79b) are controlled (step S8309). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S8310).

  When it is determined that neither big hit nor small hit is made (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 executes any pre-reading advance notice execution flag (however, “preserving ball change” pre-reading advance notice execution) It is determined whether or not (except the middle flag) is set (step S8311). If it is set, the CPU 101 for effect control subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter (step S8312). Further, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the variation counter after subtraction is 0 (step S8313). Then, if the value of the variation counter is 0, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set pre-reading notice execution flag (except for the “preserving ball change” pre-reading notice execution flag). (Step S8316). By executing such processing, in this embodiment, the pre-reading notice effect (effects other than “change in reserved ball”) is displayed until the change display one before the start of the change that has been determined for winning. Is executed, and the pre-reading notice execution flag is reset at the start of the variable display subject to the determination at the time of winning (the pre-reading notice is displayed during the variable display subject to the determination at the time of winning). There will be no directing). Note that the pre-reading notice effect may be executed even during the variable display that is the target of the determination at the time of winning.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S8317). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets the first symbol variation designation command reception flag and the second symbol variation designation command reception flag. The effect control CPU 101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process or the fourth symbol process (for example, as shown in step S811 in FIG. 42, the variation pattern). The fluctuation pattern command reception flag may be reset immediately after confirming the command reception flag). However, for example, because the symbol variation designation command is referred to in both the effect control process and the fourth symbol process, as shown in this embodiment, the effect symbol variation stop process or the like at the end of the variation. It is desirable to reset at the end of the big hit or at the end of the big hit effect processing. In addition, when the CPU 101 for effect control performs control to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the effect mode of “change of reserved ball” in step S8108, the corresponding reserved ball change effect execution flag is set in the reserved ball display processing table. Reset (set to 0). Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8318).

(Table for holding ball display processing)
As described above, the effect control CPU 101 stores the reserved ball display processing table in the RAM. As shown in FIG. 65 and FIG. 66, the reserved ball display processing table includes a display area (display area 1, display area 2,..., Display area from the left of the screen in the total reserved memory display unit 18c. 8) In correspondence with 8), the display mode (first normal display, second normal display, first special display (blue), second special display (blue), first special display of the holding sphere displayed in the display area Display (red), second special display (red), first special display (S), second special display (S), missing mode, or non-display), and the reserved ball displayed in the display area A reserved ball change effect flag indicating whether or not the hold ball change effect has been executed, and an area for storing the effect number of the hold ball change effect executed or executed for the hold ball displayed in the display area is secured. Has been. Here, when the white reserved ball is displayed in the display area, the display control CPU 101 sets the display mode corresponding to the display area to “first normal display”, and the gray reserved ball is displayed in the display area. The display mode corresponding to the display area is “second normal display”, and when the blue holding ball is displayed in the display area, the display mode corresponding to the display area is “first special display ( Blue) ”or“ second special display (blue) ”, and when a red holding ball is displayed in the display area, the display mode corresponding to the display area is“ first special display (red) ”or“ first “2 special display (red)” and when the S pictogram is displayed in the display area, the display mode corresponding to the display area is “first special display (S)” or “second special display (S)”. When a green holding ball is displayed in the display area, the display area A display mode corresponding to the "omission embodiment", when not in the hold display in the display area to a display mode corresponding to the display region and the "hidden".

  FIG. 65 (a) shows an example of the reserved ball display processing table in the case where the effect symbol is changing and the total reserved memory number is three. In this state, “first normal display” is stored as the display mode of each of the display areas 1 to 3. Therefore, the display areas 1 to 3 are in a state where all white reserved balls are displayed. Further, the production numbers corresponding to these display areas 1 to 3 are all “000 (no production)”, and the pre-reading notice production of “change in reserved ball” is not performed. Therefore, the pre-reading notice execution flag of “change in holding ball” is in a reset state (set to 0).

  In this state, it is assumed that a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 has occurred. Further, it is assumed that with the start winning, the effect control CPU 101 determines to perform the pre-reading notice effect in the “reserved ball change” mode in S6010. At this time, the effect control CPU 101 increases the first normal display in step S6017A. That is, a white reserved sphere is displayed in the fourth display area. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 65B, the presentation control CPU 101 sets the display mode corresponding to the fourth display area to “first normal display” in the reservation ball display processing table. Next, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 101 determines the shape change in step S6018A, determines the shape (breaks) in step 6019B, and determines to execute the effect number B14 in step S6019D. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the effect control CPU 101 sets the effect number corresponding to the fourth display area to “B14” in the reservation ball display processing table, and the fourth display in step S6019F. A reserved ball change effect execution flag corresponding to the area is set (set to 1).

  When the change that was being performed at the time of starting winning is stopped, control for executing the pre-reading notice effect in the effect mode of “holding ball change” is not performed in step S8108. It remains set. Next, when the CPU 101 for effect control receives the total pending storage count subtraction designation command accompanying the start of a new change, the first pending display in the total pending storage display unit 18c is erased, and the remaining pending display is set to 1. Shift one by one (step S662A). Accordingly, the effect control CPU 101 displays the contents of the storage area corresponding to the display area 1 of the reservation ball display processing table (“display mode”, “hold ball change effect execution flag”, and “effect number”). Delete and shift the contents of the storage area corresponding to display area 2 and later. That is, the data in the display area 2 is shifted to the data in the display area 1, the data in the display area 3 is shifted to the data in the display area 2, and the data in the display area 8 is shifted to the data in the display area 7. In the display area 8, the display mode is “non-display”, the reserved ball change effect execution flag is “0 (reset state)”, and the effect number is “000 (no effect)”.

  With this process, the contents of the storage area corresponding to the display area 4 are shifted to the storage area of the display area 3 as shown in FIGS. Further, it is confirmed in step S8017A that the reserved ball change effect execution flag is set (in this example, it is set in the display area 3 as shown in FIG. 65C) (Y), and the reserved ball change effect is set. On the condition that time <variable time, control for executing the effect of the effect number B14 is performed in step S8108. The effect of the effect number B14 is an effect of breaking the reserved ball, and as shown in FIG. 54 described later, a dwarf appears, and the reserved ball is divided by a hammer to return (FIGS. 54 (5) to (7)). Is. When the holding ball breaks, an S pictogram appears from the holding ball, and thereafter, this becomes a holding display. The effect control CPU 101 resets the reserved ball change effect execution flag corresponding to the display area 3 in step S8317 in association with the effect of the effect number B14 being executed in step S8108 in the process when the change is stopped. The display mode corresponding to the display area 3 is defined as “first special display (S)” (FIG. 65C).

  Next, when the CPU 101 for effect control receives the total pending storage count subtraction designation command accompanying the start of a new change, the first pending display in the total pending storage display unit 18c is erased, and the remaining pending display is set to 1. Shift one by one (step S662A). Along with this, the production control CPU 101 deletes the contents of the storage area corresponding to the display area 1 of the reservation ball display processing table, and shifts the contents of the storage areas corresponding to the display area 2 and thereafter (FIG. 65 ( d)). When a valid value (a value other than 000 in this example) is stored as an effect number corresponding to any one of the display areas 1 to 8, the pre-reading notice execution flag for the change of the holding ball is set. It is the state that was done.

  FIG. 66 (a) shows an example of the reserved ball display processing table when the effect symbol is changing and the total number of reserved memory is two. In this state, “first normal display” is stored as the display mode of the display area 1, and a white reserved ball is displayed in the display area 1. The production number corresponding to the display area 1 is “000 (no production)”. Further, “first special display (S)” is stored as a display mode of the display area 2, and an S pictogram is displayed in the display area 2. The reserved ball change effect execution flag of the display area 2 is reset (0), and B14 which is a valid value as the effect number is stored. Accordingly, the pre-reading notice execution flag for the reserved ball change is set (1).

  In this state, it is assumed that a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 has occurred. Further, it is assumed that with the start winning, the effect control CPU 101 determines to perform the pre-reading notice effect in the “reserved ball change” mode in S6010. Here, the CPU 101 for effect control performs the pre-reading notice effect in the form of “change in the holding ball” in S6010 even if the pre-reading notice execution flag of the holding ball change is set in S6002 (N). Can be determined. Therefore, even if the hold display of the first special display or the second special display already exists, it is possible to perform a pre-reading notice effect in the form of “change in hold ball” accompanying a new start winning. When the CPU 101 for effect control determines to perform the pre-reading notice effect in the “reserved ball change” mode in S6010, the first normal display is increased in step S6017A. That is, a white reserved sphere is displayed in the third display area. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the effect control CPU 101 sets the display mode corresponding to the third display area to “first normal display” in the reserved ball display processing table. Next, it is assumed that the effect control CPU 101 determines the color change in step S6018A, determines the color (red) in step 6018B, and executes the effect number A24 in step S6018D. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 66 (b), the effect control CPU 101 sets the effect number corresponding to the third display area to “A24” in the reserved ball display processing table, and the third display in step S6019F. A reserved ball change effect execution flag corresponding to the area is set (set to 1).

  When the change that was being performed at the time of starting winning is stopped, control for executing the pre-reading notice effect in the effect mode of “holding ball change” is not performed in step S8108. It remains set. Next, when the CPU 101 for effect control receives the total pending storage count subtraction designation command accompanying the start of a new change, the first pending display in the total pending storage display unit 18c is erased, and the remaining pending display is set to 1. Shift one by one (step S662A). Accordingly, the effect control CPU 101 displays the contents of the storage area corresponding to the display area 1 of the reservation ball display processing table (“display mode”, “hold ball change effect execution flag”, and “effect number”). Delete and shift the contents of the storage area corresponding to display area 2 and later. That is, the data in the display area 2 is shifted to the data in the display area 1, the data in the display area 3 is shifted to the data in the display area 2, and the data in the display area 8 is shifted to the data in the display area 7. In the display area 8, the display mode is “non-display”, the reserved ball change effect execution flag is “0 (reset state)”, and the effect number is “000 (no effect)”.

  By this processing, the contents of the storage area corresponding to the display area 3 are shifted to the storage area of the display area 2 as shown in FIGS. Further, it is confirmed in step S8017A that the reserved ball change effect execution flag is set (in this example, it is set in the display area 2 as shown in FIG. 66 (c)) (Y), and the reserved ball change effect is set. On the condition that time <variable time, control for executing the effect of effect number A24 is performed in step S8108. The effect of the effect number B14 is an effect of painting the color of the reserved sphere, and as shown in FIG. 60, a dwarf appears, and a color (red) is applied to the reserved sphere with a brush to return. Thereafter, the red holding ball becomes the holding display. The effect control CPU 101 resets the reserved ball change effect execution flag corresponding to the display area 2 in step S8317 in response to the effect of the effect number A24 being executed in step S8108 in the processing at the time of the change stop. The display mode corresponding to the area 2 is defined as “first special display (red)” (FIG. 66C). At this time, the display mode of the display area 1 is the first special display (S), and the display mode of the display area 2 is the first special display (red). Thus, it is also possible to change the mode of a plurality of reservation balls by different production systems.

  If the shape change is determined in step S6018A (N) in the start winning prize described above (N) and “not broken” is determined as the shape in step S6018B, the B14 effect number (“break” effect) has already been put on hold. Since it is stored in the sphere display processing table, it is determined YES in step S6019C, and the effect that the reserved sphere is not broken (B0X) is not performed.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (step S804) in the effect control process. In the jackpot display process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open designation command has been received is set (step S1901). When the big prize opening open flag is not set (N in step S1901), the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S1902), and the effect device (effect display) Control of the device 9, the speaker 27, the LEDs 25, 28, etc.) is executed (step S1903). For example, the effect display device 9 displays a jackpot display symbol and performs an effect of displaying a character or character indicating that a jackpot has occurred.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S1904), and if the process timer has timed out, switches the process data (step S1905). That is, the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data) set next in the process table is switched. Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S1906).

  When the big prize opening open flag is set (Y in step S1901), the production control CPU 101 resets the big prize opening open flag (step S1907) and selects process data corresponding to the production during the round. (Step S1908). Then, the process timer is started (step S1909), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the mid-round processing (step S805) (step S1910).

  In addition, a process process for displaying a small hit is provided separately from the process for displaying a big hit. Sufficient time (for example, 0.5 seconds) may be produced in the same manner as in the case of sudden big hit.

  In addition, in the case of a small hit or sudden probability variation big hit, the production control CPU 101 does not execute the presentation based on reception of the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command, for example, for the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit. Based on the reception of the fluctuation pattern command, an effect that suggests a small hit or suddenly probable big hit may be executed for a predetermined period. In this case, the CPU 101 for effect control switches the process data for performing an effect that suggests a small hit or a sudden probability change big hit every process time, and performs the effect according to the switched process data.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S807) in the effect control process. In the big hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 101 first subtracts one effect period measurement timer for measuring the effect period of the ending effect (step S880). And it is confirmed whether the production period measurement timer after subtraction has timed out (step S881). The effect period measurement timer is set based on the confirmation of reception of the ending command, for example, during the round process (see step S805).

  If the production period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S881), the production control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S882). In addition, the CPU 101 for effect control is based on the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1, movable member control data 1), and the effect device (the effect display device 9 as an effect part). Then, various lamps as the production parts, the speaker 27 as the production parts, and the movable member 78 and the production blade accessories 79a and 79b as the production parts are controlled (step S883). For example, an effect of displaying that the big hit ends or displaying a predetermined character or the like is executed.

  Next, when the process timer has not timed out (N in step S884), the effect control CPU 101 ends the process. When the process timer times out (Y in step S884), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S885). Further, the production control CPU 101 starts a process timer (step S886).

  If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step S881), the effect control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S888). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets command reception flags such as a first symbol variation designation command reception flag and a second symbol variation designation command reception flag. Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S889).

  Next, a specific example of the effect mode of the prefetch notice effect will be described. FIGS. 51 to 54 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of effects of the pre-reading notice effect. Among these, FIG. 51 shows a specific example of the effect of the pre-reading notice effect of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”. FIG. 52 shows a specific example of the effect of the pre-reading notice effect of “mode change”. FIG. 53 shows a specific example of the effect of the “countdown” prefetching notice effect. FIG. 54 shows a specific example of the effect of the pre-reading notice effect of “reserved ball change”. 51 to 54, the aspect of the effect screen changes in the order of (1) (2) (3). Also, in the examples shown in FIGS. 51 to 54, the winning determination is made for the start winning to the first start winning opening 13, and the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, a pre-reading notice effect is shown when the game is held, but the determination at the time of winning is made with respect to the start winning to the second start winning opening 14, and the change of the effect symbol is synchronized with the change display of the second special symbol. Even when the pre-reading notice effect is performed during display, the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the same manner.

  First, with reference to FIG. 51, a specific example of the effect of the pre-reading notice effect of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 51, first, as shown in FIG. 51 (2), when the change display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the change display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 51 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S1217). Then, a winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variable category command) according to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see steps S1218 and S1219). Further, within the same interruption, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the first start winning designation command and the combined pending storage number designation command as the pending storage information (see steps S1220 and S1221), and the production control microcomputer 100 As shown in FIG. 51 (2), based on the received first start winning designation command and total pending storage number designation command, the pending display in the total pending storage display unit 18c (in this example, the first normal display) Is increased by 1 (see step S6021). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the execution of the pre-reading notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result designation command, and “the change in the variation mode at the time of symbol change” as the effect of the pre-reading notice effect. "Is determined (see step S800A). Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbols are stopped and displayed (see step S8302). As shown in FIGS. 51 (1) and 51 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 51 (3).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in the variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect. . Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (5), the variation time ends and the chance symbol is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 51 (4), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 51 (5), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 51 (6), the pending display in the total pending storage display unit 18c. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in the variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 51 (6), a predetermined effect is performed such as displaying an aspect in which a flash shines above the display screen of the effect display device 9 when the effect symbol starts to change (see step S8108). Note that the predetermined effect performed at the start of the change of the effect symbol is not limited to the one shown in FIG. The movable object having the shape described above may be moved at the start of fluctuation, or a predetermined lamp may be turned on or blinked at the start of fluctuation. Further, for example, the way of starting the change of the design at the start of the change of the effect design may be made different from normal. For example, in the case where the left, middle, and right production symbols usually start to change at the same time, the left, middle, and right production symbols start to change at different timings, or once start to change upward (or downward) As shown in FIG. 5, the fluctuation may be started downward (or upward). Conversely, in FIG. 51 (5), the way of stopping the variation of the symbols may be different from the normal one. For example, the symbols may be stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, but the symbols may be stopped in the order of left, middle, and right.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 51 (7), the effect symbol variation display is executed (see step S8105), and as shown in FIG. 51 (8), the variation time ends and the chance symbol is stopped and displayed ( Step S8302). 51 (6) and (7), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 51 (8).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 51 (9), the pending display in the total pending storage display section 18c. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in the variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect. . In addition, as shown in FIG. 51 (9), a predetermined effect is performed such as displaying an aspect in which a flash shines above the display screen of the effect display device 9 when the effect symbol starts to change (see step S8108). Also in the case shown in FIG. 51 (9), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Thereafter, the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is started. Furthermore, the notice effect of the same effect mode may be executed when the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 51, during the execution of the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, and the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed. When the stop display is performed, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is also stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is continuously displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol until the next variable display is started. Therefore, in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, the variation of the fourth symbol is always displayed, or the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped. This also applies to the case where the prefetch notice effect is executed in the effect modes shown in FIGS. Further, when the game state is shifted to the big hit gaming state, the display in the fourth symbol display area may not be performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 52, a specific example of the effect of the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 52, first, as shown in FIG. 52 (2), when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 52 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S1217). Then, a winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variable category command) according to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see steps S1218 and S1219). Further, within the same interruption, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the first start winning designation command and the combined pending storage number designation command as the pending storage information (see steps S1220 and S1221), and the production control microcomputer 100 As shown in FIG. 52 (2), based on the received first start winning designation command and total pending storage number designation command, the pending display in the total pending storage display unit 18c (in this example, the first normal display) Is increased by 1 (see step S6021). In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 decides execution of the pre-reading notice effect and decides “mode shift” as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result designation command. (See step S800A). Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbol is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). As shown in FIGS. 52 (1) and 52 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 52 (3).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 52 (4), the pending display in the total pending storage display unit 18c. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. In this case, based on the fact that “mode shift” has been determined as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100, during the change display of the effect symbol, as shown in FIG. 52 (4), An effect in which another background screen is interrupted from the side of the currently displayed background screen on the display screen of the effect display device 9 and the two background screens overlap each other (for example, a sea background screen and a mountain background) An effect of a mode in which the screen is in contact with the screen is executed (see step S8108). Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (5), the variation time is finished, and an effect of an aspect that is finally pushed back to the original background screen is executed (see step S8108), and the final stop symbol (FIG. 52 ( In 5), the dissociation symbol) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 52 (4), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 52 (5).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 52 (6), the pending display in the total pending storage display section 18c. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “mode shift” is determined as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect during the effect symbol change display as shown in FIG. 52 (6). An effect in which another background screen is interrupted from the side of the currently displayed background screen on the display screen of the display device 9 and the two background screens overlap each other (for example, a sea background screen and a mountain background screen) The effect of an aspect that makes it seem to meet is executed (see step S8108). Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (7), the variation time is finished, and an effect of an aspect that is finally pushed back to the original background screen is executed (see step S8108), and the final stop symbol (FIG. 52 ( In step 7), the off symbol) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 52 (6), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 52 (7).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 52 (8), the pending display in the total pending storage display section 18c. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “mode shift” is determined as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect during the effect symbol change display as shown in FIG. 52 (8). An effect in which another background screen is interrupted from the side of the currently displayed background screen on the display screen of the display device 9 and the two background screens overlap each other (for example, a sea background screen and a mountain background screen) The effect of an aspect that makes it seem to meet is executed (see step S8108). Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (9), the variation time is finished, and an effect of an aspect that is finally pushed back to the original background screen is executed (see step S8108), and the final stop symbol (FIG. 52 (9)). In 9), the off symbol) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 52 (8), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 52 (9).

  In the above-described manner, the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the subject of determination at the time of winning is started. Furthermore, the notice effect of the same effect mode may be executed when the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is executed. In this case, when the display result of the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is “big hit”, for example, after performing the effect in such a manner that the two background screens overlap each other, Alternatively, the background screen that has interrupted from the side wins and the background screen is switched, and the jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. In addition, the mode of the pre-reading notice effect of “mode shift” is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. You may make it perform the effect of the aspect from which a background screen changes for every display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, a specific example of the effect of the “countdown” pre-reading notice effect will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 53, first, as shown in FIG. 53 (2), when the change display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the change display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 53 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S1217). Then, a winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variable category command) according to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see steps S1218 and S1219). Further, within the same interruption, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the first start winning designation command and the combined pending storage number designation command as the pending storage information (see steps S1220 and S1221), and the production control microcomputer 100 As shown in FIG. 53 (2), based on the received first start winning designation command and total pending storage number designation command, the pending display in the total pending storage display portion 18c (in this example, the first normal display) Is increased by 1 (see step S6021). In this case, it is assumed that the production control microcomputer 100 decides execution of the pre-reading notice effect and “countdown” as the production mode of the pre-reading notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result designation command. (See step S800A). Note that the number of counts in the “countdown” pre-reading notice effect may be, for example, the total pending storage number when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined. Alternatively, a pre-counter notice effect of “count down” may be determined on condition that there is a predetermined number (for example, 2 or more) of reserved memories that can be counted down. Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbols are stopped and displayed (see step S8302). As shown in FIGS. 53 (1) and 53 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 53 (3).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 53 (4), the pending display in the total pending storage display section 18c. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. In this case, based on the fact that “countdown” is determined as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the effect during the change display of the effect symbol as shown in FIG. 53 (4). A character string such as “Count 3!” Is displayed on the display screen of the display device 9 and an effect is performed as if the countdown was started (see step S8108). Then, the variation time ends, and as shown in FIG. 53 (5), the final stop symbol (the symbol that is off in FIG. 53 (5)) is stopped and displayed (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 53 (4), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 53 (5).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “countdown” is determined as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the effect during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 53 (6). A character string such as “Count 2!” Is displayed on the display screen of the device 9 and the effect is such that the countdown continues (see step S8108). Then, the fluctuation time ends, and the final stop symbol (the symbol that is off in FIG. 53 (7)) is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 53 (7) (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 53 (6), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 53 (7), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 53 (8), the pending display in the total pending storage display section 18c. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “countdown” is determined as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the effect during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 53 (8). A character string such as “Count 1!” Is displayed on the display screen of the device 9 and the effect is such that the countdown continues (see step S8108). Then, the fluctuation time is finished, and the final stop symbol (the symbol that is off in FIG. 53 (9)) is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 53 (9) (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 53 (8), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 53 (9).

  In the above-described manner, the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the subject of determination at the time of winning is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a specific example of the effect of the pre-reading notice effect of “reserved ball change” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 54, first, as shown in FIG. 54 (2), when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 54 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly-started winning (see step S1217). Then, a winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variable category command) according to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see steps S1218 and S1219). Also, within the same interrupt, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a first start winning designation command and a combined pending storage number designation command as pending storage information (see steps S1220 and S1221). In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines “holding ball change” as an effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect, and decides to execute the pre-reading notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result designation command. (See steps S6010 and S6011). Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (2), the production control microcomputer 100 performs the first normal display on the total pending storage display unit 18c based on the received first start winning designation command and total pending storage number designation command. (White reserved ball) is increased by 1 (see step S6017A). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 decides the shape change as the reserved ball change mode (see step S6018A), decides “break” as the shape (see step S6019B), and decides “B14” as the production. (Step S6019D). Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (3), it is assumed that the fluctuation time has ended and the symbols are stopped and displayed (see step S8302). As shown in FIGS. 54 (1) and 54 (2), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is also executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 54 (3), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 54 (4), the pending display in the total pending storage display section 18c. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (4), each hold display is shifted one by one. Then, as shown in FIGS. 54 (4) and (5), the production control microcomputer 100 produces the production number with the start of the production symbol variation display (at the timing immediately after the variation display is started in this example). The effect of B14 is also started (see step S8108). In the production of the production number B14, a dwarf appears (FIG. 54 (5)), and the action of dividing the reserved ball in the third display area with a hammer is performed to divide the reserved ball (FIG. 54 (6)). The dwarf returns (Fig. 54 (7)). The S pictogram (first special display (S)) appears from the broken holding ball here, and this is the holding display thereafter. Then, the fluctuation time is ended, and the final stop symbol (the symbol that is off in FIG. 54 (8)) is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 54 (8) (see step S8302). In the cases shown in FIGS. 54 (4) to 54 (7), the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol during the variation display of the effect symbol. Then, based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 54 (8).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and as shown in FIG. 54 (9), the pending display in the total pending storage display section 18c. Is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and the next effect symbol variation display is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (9), each holding display including the remaining first special display is shifted one by one, and the pre-reading notice of the effect mode of “change of holding ball” is continued. Then, the fluctuation time is ended, and the final stop symbol (the symbol that is off in FIG. 54 (10)) is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 54 (10) (see step S8302). Also in the case shown in FIG. 54 (9), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command, as shown in FIG. 54 (10), the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the total pending storage number subtraction designation command, and reduces the pending display in the total pending storage display unit 18c by 1 (see step S662A). The change display of the effect design is started. Then, each holding display including the remaining first special display is shifted one by one, and the prefetching notice of the effect mode of “holding ball change” is continued. Then, the variation time ends, and the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed (see step S8302).

  In the above-described manner, the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the subject of determination at the time of winning is started. Then, the hold memory is digested for each variable display, and the “holding ball change” is continued until the hold display to be notified (the first special display in the example shown in FIG. 54) is deleted from the combined hold storage display unit 18c. The pre-reading notice of the production mode is continued.

  Next, the execution timing of the prefetch notice effect will be described. 55 and 56 are explanatory diagrams showing the execution timing of the prefetch notice effect. Among these, FIG. 55 shows the execution timing of the pre-reading notice effect of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”. FIG. 56 shows the execution timing of the pre-reading notice effect for “reserved ball change”. Note that the execution timing of the pre-reading notice effect of “mode transition” or “countdown” is the same as that of the execution timing of the pre-reading notice effect of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol change” shown in FIG. Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, a case where a new start winning is generated during the variation display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shown.

  First, with reference to FIG. 55, the execution timing of the pre-reading notice effect of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” will be described. When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (see step S311), it executes the effect process at the time of winning (see steps S1217 and S1228). Judgment at the time of winning. In the example shown in FIG. 55, it is assumed that there is a new start prize in the change display A of the effect symbol, and a determination at the time of winning is made. Then, a winning determination result designation command (symbol designation command, variable category command) is transmitted based on the winning determination result (see steps S1218, S1219, S1229, S1230), and the pending storage information is stored in the same interrupt. As a start winning designation command (first start winning designation command or second start winning designation command) and a total pending storage number designation command (see steps S1220, S1221, S1231, and S1232).

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 55, it is assumed that the total number of pending storage before reception of the winning determination result designation command and the pending storage information is 3, and the production control microcomputer 100 displays the production symbol variation display A. It is assumed that the total number of pending storage has reached 4 due to the starting prize. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a prefetching notice effect determination process based on the received winning determination result designation command (see step S800A), and a prefetching notice effect determination process (see step S6010). It is assumed that “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the production mode. In addition, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the current total pending storage number (“4” in the example shown in FIG. 55) in the variation counter (see step S6014). Thereafter, when the variation time of the variation display A is completed, the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1 to 3 (see step S8312).

  Next, a variation pattern command, a display result designation command, and a combined pending storage number subtraction designation command are received, and the next variation display B is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in the variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect. Shall. Then, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display B ends, and the chance symbol a is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 55 (see step S8302). Further, the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter and sets it to 2 (see step S8312). That is, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, when the pre-reading notice effect of “change in the variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is executed, a new start prize is generated during the variation display A and the pre-reading is performed. When it is decided to execute the notice effect, the prefetch notice effect is started from the next variation display B.

  Further, when starting the next variation display C, the effect control microcomputer 100, based on the fact that the value of the variation counter is 2, as shown in FIG. The pre-reading notice effect is continuously executed by performing a predetermined effect b (see step S8108), such as displaying a mode in which a flash shines above the 9 display screen. Then, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display C ends, and the chance symbol b is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 55 (see step S8302). Further, the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter and sets it to 1 (see step S8312).

  Further, when starting the next variation display D, the effect control microcomputer 100, based on the fact that the value of the variation counter is 1, as shown in FIG. The pre-reading notice effect is continuously executed by performing a predetermined effect c (see step S8108), such as displaying a mode in which a flash shines above the 9 display screen. Then, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display D ends, and the chance symbol c is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 55 (see step S8302). Further, the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter and sets it to 0 (see step S8312). Then, the production control microcomputer 100 resets the set pre-reading notice execution flag (see steps S8313 and S8316) based on the fact that the value of the fluctuation counter is 0 (see steps S8313 and S8316). finish.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, the pre-reading notice effect is shown during the variation display up to the variation display D immediately before the variation display E subject to the determination at the time of winning. However, the pre-reading notice effect may be executed even during the variation display E that is the target of the determination at the time of winning. In this embodiment, since the pre-reading notice effect is not executed in the variation display E subject to the determination at the time of winning, the pre-reading notice effect and the super reach effect are included in one variation display E. Both are executed to prevent the production from becoming too unnatural (especially, the production is surely prevented from becoming too busy just before the end of the variable display). In the case where the pre-reading notice effect is executed even during the variation display E subject to the determination at the time of winning, the pre-reading notice effect is executed before the super reach effect during the variation display E is executed. It is only necessary to execute the super reach effect after the notice effect is finished.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the execution timing of the pre-reading notice effect of “holding ball change” will be described. When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (see step S311), it executes the effect process at the time of winning (see steps S1217 and S1228). Judgment at the time of winning. In the example shown in FIG. 56, it is assumed that there is a new start prize in the variation display A of the effect symbol and the determination at the time of winning is made. Then, a winning determination result designation command (symbol designation command, variable category command) is transmitted based on the winning determination result (see steps S1218, S1219, S1229, S1230), and the pending storage information is stored in the same interrupt. As a start winning designation command (first start winning designation command or second start winning designation command) and a total pending storage number designation command (see steps S1220, S1221, S1231, and S1232).

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 56, it is assumed that the total number of pending storage before receiving the winning determination result designation command and the pending storage information is 3, and the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the effect symbol variation display A. It is assumed that the total number of pending storage has reached 4 due to the starting prize. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a prefetching notice effect determination process based on the received winning determination result designation command (see step S800A), and a prefetching notice effect determination process (see step S6010). It is assumed that the “reserved ball change” is determined as the effect mode, and the effect system (see step S6018A), the change mode (see steps S6018B and S6019B), and the effect number (see steps S6018D and S6019D) are determined. Then, by determining “reserved ball change” as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 stores the sum hold memory based on the received first start winning designation command and the sum hold memory number designation command. The first normal display or the second normal display is incremented by 1 on the display unit 18c (see Steps S6017A and S6017B). Further, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a pre-reading notice execution flag and sets a reserved ball change effect execution flag.

  Next, a variation pattern command, a display result designation command, and a combined pending storage number subtraction designation command are received, and the next variation display B is started. Then, the hold display in the combined hold storage display unit 18c is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and each hold display including the remaining first normal display or second normal display is shifted one by one. Starts the pre-reading notice effect of the determined effect number at the timing immediately after the start of the variable display B. This effect is executed during the fluctuation display B (see step S8108), and during the fluctuation display B, the first normal display or the second normal display is changed to the first special display or the second special display. In addition, with the stop of the fluctuation display B, the reserved ball change effect execution flag is reset (see step S8317).

  Thereafter, each time the change display C and the change display D are started, the hold display in the combined hold storage display unit 18c is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and each hold including the remaining first special display or second special display is performed. The display is shifted one by one, and as shown in FIG. 56, the pre-reading notice of the effect mode of “change in holding ball” continues. Then, when the notice display fluctuating display E is started, the notice hold information corresponding to the notice display fluctuating display is digested, so that the notice notice hold display (first special display or second special display) is added up. As shown in FIG. 56, the pre-reading notice of the effect mode of “change in holding ball” is terminated. Note that the pre-reading notice execution flag is reset with the start of the change display E to be notified (see step S662B).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the execution timing of the pre-reading notice effect of “holding ball change” when a shortening change (for example, the change pattern “non-reach PA1-2” shown in FIG. 6) occurs will be described. When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (see step S311), it executes the effect process at the time of winning (see steps S1217 and S1228). Judgment at the time of winning. In the example shown in FIG. 56, it is assumed that there is a new start prize in the variation display A of the effect symbol and the determination at the time of winning is made. Then, a winning determination result designation command (symbol designation command, variable category command) is transmitted based on the winning determination result (see steps S1218, S1219, S1229, S1230), and the pending storage information is stored in the same interrupt. As a start winning designation command (first start winning designation command or second start winning designation command) and a total pending storage number designation command (see steps S1220, S1221, S1231, and S1232).

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 67, it is assumed that the total number of pending storage before reception of the winning determination result designation command and the pending storage information is 3, and the production control microcomputer 100 displays the production symbol variation display A. It is assumed that the total number of pending storage has reached 4 due to the starting prize. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a prefetching notice effect determination process based on the received winning determination result designation command (see step S800A), and a prefetching notice effect determination process (see step S6010). It is assumed that the “reserved ball change” is determined as the effect mode, and the effect system (see step S6018A), the change mode (see steps S6018B and S6019B), and the effect number (see steps S6018D and S6019D) are determined. Then, by determining “reserved ball change” as the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 stores the sum hold memory based on the received first start winning designation command and the sum hold memory number designation command. The first normal display or the second normal display is incremented by 1 on the display unit 18c (see Steps S6017A and S6017B). Further, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a pre-reading notice execution flag and sets a reserved ball change effect execution flag.

  Next, a variation pattern command, a display result designation command, and a combined pending storage number subtraction designation command are received, and the next variation display B is started. Then, the hold display in the combined hold storage display unit 18c is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and each hold display including the remaining first normal display or second normal display is shifted one by one. Here, the fluctuation display B is a shortened fluctuation, and it is assumed that the reserved ball change effect time of the determined effect number ≧ the change time. At this time, NO is determined in step S8017B, and in step S8017C, a process is performed in which the determined effect is carried over to the next change. Therefore, the determined effect is not executed in step S8108, and even if the change display B stops, the reserved ball change effect execution flag remains set (see step S8317).

  Next, a variation pattern command, a display result designation command, and a combined pending storage number subtraction designation command are received, and the next variation display C is started. Then, the hold display in the combined hold storage display unit 18c is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and each hold display including the remaining first normal display or second normal display is shifted one by one. Here, it is assumed that the variation display C is not a shortened variation, but the reserved ball change effect time of the determined effect number <the change time. At this time, YES is determined in step S8017A, and YES is also determined in step S8017B, so the carry-over process in step S8017C is not performed. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the pre-reading notice production of the decided production number at the timing immediately after the start of the variable display C. This effect is executed during the fluctuation display C (see step S8108), and during the fluctuation display C, the first normal display or the second normal display is changed to the first special display or the second special display. In addition, with the stop of the fluctuation display C, the reserved ball change effect execution flag is reset (see step S8317).

  Thereafter, when the variable display D is started, the hold display in the combined hold storage display unit 18c is reduced by 1 (see step S662A), and each hold display including the remaining first special display or second special display is one by one. As shown in FIG. 67, the pre-reading notice of the effect mode of “change in reserved ball” continues. Then, when the notice display fluctuating display E is started, the notice hold information corresponding to the notice display fluctuating display is digested, so that the notice notice hold display (first special display or second special display) is added up. As shown in FIG. 67, the pre-reading notice of the effect mode “change in the holding ball” is terminated. Note that the pre-reading notice execution flag is reset with the start of the change display E to be notified (see step S662B).

  Next, the prefetch notice setting limit period will be described. 57 and 58 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the prefetch notice setting limit period. Among these, FIG. 57 shows the prefetching notice setting restriction period when the start winning designation command as the storage information is missed. FIG. 58 shows a pre-reading notice setting restriction period when a variation category command as determination result information is missed. Note that the pre-reading notice setting limit period when the total pending storage number designation command or the symbol designation command is missed or when there is a mismatch in the received command is the same as in FIGS. 57 and 58.

  First, the case where the start winning designation command is missed will be described with reference to FIG. When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (see step S311), it executes the effect process at the time of winning (see steps S1217 and S1228). Judgment at the time of winning. In the example shown in FIG. 57, it is assumed that there is a new start prize in the change display A of the effect symbol and the determination at the time of winning is made. Then, control is performed to transmit a winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variable category command) based on the winning determination result (see steps S1218, S1219, S1229, S1230), and within the same interrupt, Control is performed to transmit a start prize designation command (first start prize designation command or second start prize designation command) and a combined pending memory number designation command as the hold storage information (see steps S1220, S1221, S1231, and S1232).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 57, for some reason (for example, due to abnormality in transmission processing on the game control microcomputer 560 side or data corruption), the production control microcomputer 100 is started. It is assumed that the winning designation command has not been received normally. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the command at the time of start winning has not been received normally (see steps S6004 to S6006), sets the prefetching advance setting restriction flag (see step S6033), and makes the prefetching advance notice. Control during the setting limit period.

  Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not there is still a storage area in the storage state where the command could not be received correctly in the start winning prize command storage area every time the change display B to D is started. As shown in FIG. 57, as shown in FIG. 57, the storage area in the storage state in which the command was not correctly received at the timing of starting the variable display E for the reserved storage that caused the restriction of the prefetch notice setting. If it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice setting restriction flag is reset (see step S8005), the prefetching advance notice setting restriction period ends.

  Next, a case where the variation category command is missed will be described with reference to FIG. When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start winning to the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14 (see step S311), it executes the effect process at the time of winning (see steps S1217 and S1228). Judgment at the time of winning. In the example shown in FIG. 58, it is assumed that there is a new start prize in the change display A of the effect symbol and the determination at the time of winning is performed. Then, control is performed to transmit a winning determination result designation command (design designation command, variable category command) based on the winning determination result (see steps S1218, S1219, S1229, S1230), and within the same interrupt, Control is performed to transmit a start prize designation command (first start prize designation command or second start prize designation command) and a combined pending memory number designation command as the hold storage information (see steps S1220, S1221, S1231, and S1232).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 58, for some reason (for example, due to an abnormality in transmission processing on the game control microcomputer 560 side or data corruption), the production control microcomputer 100 changes. It is assumed that the category command has not been received normally. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the command at the time of start winning has not been received normally (see steps S6004 to S6006), sets the prefetching advance setting restriction flag (see step S6033), and makes the prefetching advance notice. Control during the setting limit period.

  Thereafter, the production control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not there is still a storage area in the storage state where the command could not be received correctly in the start winning prize command storage area every time the change display B to D is started. 58 (see steps S8002 to S8004), as shown in FIG. 58, the storage area in the storage state in which the command could not be received correctly at the timing of starting the change display E for the reserved storage that caused the restriction of the prefetch notice setting. If it is determined that the pre-reading advance notice setting restriction flag is reset (see step S8005), the prefetching advance notice setting restriction period ends.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made when a start winning occurs, a big hit type or a variation pattern type, Whether hold memory information (in this example, start winning designation command and combined pending memory number designation command) is transmitted so that the increase in the first hold memory or the second hold memory can be recognized, and whether or not the big win or the small win Alternatively, determination result information (in this example, a symbol designation command and a variation category command) indicating the determination result of the jackpot type and the variation pattern type is transmitted. Further, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes a pre-reading notice effect for notifying that there is a possibility of a predetermined state (in this example, super reach) based on the determination result information, and is included in the hold storage information. Execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted when the start winning designation command to be received cannot be normally received. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reliability of the prefetch notice effect from being lowered.

  That is, determination result information (in this example, a symbol designation command and a variable category command) and hold storage information (in this example, a start prize designation command and a total pending storage) received collectively in one timer interruption at the time of a start winning prize If some commands are missed, even if other commands received in a batch are received, the reliability of the received commands may be lacking. If the prefetching notice effect is executed based on the received command as it is, there is a discrepancy between the contents of the prefetching notice effect and the actual display of the variable display of the notice object that is actually executed. Reliability may be reduced. Therefore, in this embodiment, the reliability of the prefetching notice effect is reduced by restricting the execution of the prefetching notice effect when the start winning designation command included in the hold storage information cannot be normally received. To prevent it.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the start winning designation command included in the hold memory information transmitted based on the one hold memory cannot be normally received, the fluctuation based on the one hold memory The execution of the pre-reading notice effect is limited until the display is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the prefetching notice effect from being unmatched and the reliability of the prefetching notice effect from being lowered.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the determination result information (in this example, the symbol designating command and the variable category command) transmitted based on one hold storage cannot be normally received, The execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted until the variable display based on the hold storage of the first time is started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the prefetching notice effect from being unmatched and the reliability of the prefetching notice effect from being lowered.

  In this embodiment, there is a case where execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted from when a command is missed or inconsistent until the reserved memory where the command is missed or inconsistent is exhausted. Although shown, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is limited only to the reserved memory where the command is missed or inconsistent, and the command at the start winning prize is normally set for the reserved memory generated after that If received, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect may not be restricted even before the reserved memory in which the command is missed or inconsistent has been consumed. In the case of such a configuration, for example, the process of confirming the prefetching notice setting restriction flag in step S6003 of the prefetching notice effect determining process, the process of setting the undetermined information in step S6031, and the steps S8000 to S8014 of the effect symbol variation starting process. This processing is unnecessary.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the determination of the prefetching notice effect is not performed when a command is missed or inconsistency occurs, but the determination of the prefetching notice effect itself is performed. The execution may be restricted. For example, in the pre-reading notice effect determination process, when a command miss or mismatch is detected in the determination process of steps S6004 to S6006, the process of step S6033 is executed to set the prefetching notice setting restriction flag, while steps S6004 to S6006. Regardless of the determination result or the presence / absence of the prefetching notice setting restriction flag, the process of determining the prefetching notice effect in steps S6007 to S6019E may be executed without fail. If the prefetch notice setting restriction flag is set, the process of step S8108 of the effect symbol changing process may not be performed, and the prefetch notice effect may be restricted from being executed. In addition, as described above, the process of determining the pre-reading notice effect in steps S6007 to S6019E is necessarily executed, and for example, the execution timing of the process in step S8108 of the effect symbol changing process (execution of the pre-reading notice effect) At the timing), it is checked every time whether there are any missing or inconsistent commands stored in the command storage area at the time of the start winning prize. If something remains, it may be limited not to execute the pre-reading notice effect.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 includes, as the determination result information, whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit, a symbol designation command that can specify the determination result of the big hit type, and a predetermined value. A variable category command that can specify whether or not a state (in this example, super reach) is set is transmitted. The effect control microcomputer 100 also restricts the execution of the pre-reading notice effect even when the determination result specified by the received symbol designation command is inconsistent with the determination result specified by the received variation category command. For this reason, it is possible to further prevent the prefetching notice effect from being unmatched and the reliability of the prefetching notice effect from being lowered.

  Further, according to this embodiment, as the pre-reading notice effect, the notice effect that starts at a timing other than the timing at which the start winning is generated (in this example, the timing at which the next variable display is started after the start winning is generated). (In this example, “pre-reading notice effect of“ change in change mode at the time of symbol change ”,“ mode transition ”,“ countdown ”, and“ change in hold ball ”) can be executed. The production control microcomputer 100 is stored when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted after the change display based on one hold storage is started and the restriction on the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is released. A notice effect can be executed based on the hold memory. For this reason, it is possible to cancel the restricted state of the pre-reading notice effect early without making the content of the pre-reading notice effect feel uncomfortable. Can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 performs a continuous effect (in this example, a “countdown” pre-reading notice effect) that is executed in a continuous manner over a plurality of variable displays as the pre-reading notice effect. Can be executed, and after the display of fluctuation based on one hold memory is started and the restriction on the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is released, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted, and then based on the hold memory stored. The execution of continuous production is limited as a pre-reading notice production to be executed. Therefore, by restricting the execution of the continuous effect, it is possible to prevent the variable display targeted by the prefetching notice effect executed after the restriction on the execution of the prefetching notice effect being lifted from being obfuscated.

  Also, in this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the variable display based on one hold memory, and after the restriction on the execution of the prefetching notice effect is released, the execution of the prefetching notice effect is restricted. It may be configured not to execute the pre-reading notice effect based on the hold storage stored when the user is present (for example, in the effect symbol variation start process shown in FIG. 43, after executing the process of step S8005, the process directly proceeds to step S8015. The process may be performed and the processes of steps S8006 to S8014 may not be executed). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an increase in processing load and program capacity for determining whether to perform the pre-reading notice effect.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a start winning designation command and a combined pending storage number designation command as the pending storage information. The effect control microcomputer 100 restricts the execution of the pre-reading notice effect even if the specified result of the received start winning designation command is inconsistent with the specified result of the received total pending storage number designation command. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the reliability of the prefetch notice effect from being lowered.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, when it is determined that super reach is determined, the first mode (in this example, “countdown”) or the second mode (in this example, “when symbol changes”). Change of change mode ”,“ mode transition ”) can be executed, and when it is determined that the super-reach is not determined, the pre-read notification effect of the second mode can be executed. . Further, the production control microcomputer 100 can execute the prefetching notice effect of the second mode even when execution of the prefetching notice effect is restricted. For this reason, the pre-reading notice effect of the second mode that can be executed both in the case of becoming a super reach and in the case of not being super-reachable can be executed even when execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted. In addition to ensuring the reliability of the production, the appearance frequency of the pre-reading notice production can be secured to some extent, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 displays the first special symbol variation display or the second special symbol variation in the order in which the first winning prize opening 13 or the second starting prize opening is awarded. Execute the display. Then, even if the production control microcomputer 100 cannot successfully receive the start winning designation command, it adds the total pending storage number designation command and the determination result information (design designation command, variation category command). If received, the notice effect of the second mode can be executed. Therefore, even if the start winning designation command cannot be normally received, if the total pending storage number designation command and the determination result information (symbol designation command, variable category command) are received, the super reach Since the second aspect of the notice effect that can be executed in both the cases where it becomes and the case where it is not possible is executed, the appearance frequency of the prefetch notice effect is prevented to some extent while preventing the reliability of the prefetch notice effect from being lowered. It can be secured and the interest in games can be improved.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 restricts execution of the pre-reading notice production even when the pending storage information and the determination result information cannot be received in the regular order. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the reliability of the prefetch notice effect from being lowered.

  Moreover, according to this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 performs a hold display on the combined hold storage display unit 18c based on the hold storage information. And even if it is a case where hold storage information or judgment result information cannot be received normally, when recognizing that the 1st hold memory or the 2nd hold memory increased, it will be in the increased hold memory. The display mode of the corresponding hold display is displayed in a special display mode (in this example, the hold-down display in the missed mode) different from the normal display mode (in this example, the first normal display and the second normal display). For this reason, even if the hold memory information or the determination result information cannot be received normally, the number of the hold memories can be recognized by the player, and the player is prevented from feeling distrust. can do.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed in the order of the start winning prizes of the first starting winning prize port 13 and the second starting winning prize port 14, for example, Regardless of the winning order, it may be configured to preferentially execute the variation display of the second special symbol as compared with the variation display of the first special symbol. Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed in this way, instead of the start winning designation command and the combined pending memory number designation command as the pending memory information, the first reserved memory number or the second You may comprise so that the pending | holding memory number addition designation | designated command (1st pending | holding memory number addition designation | designated command or 2nd pending | holding memory number addition designation | designated command) which shows that the pending | holding memory number increased may be transmitted. That is, when a start winning is generated, a set of three commands, that is, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory count addition designation command, may be transmitted collectively within one timer interrupt. Even in such a case, if the production control microcomputer 100 limits the execution of the pre-reading notice production based on having missed the reserved storage number addition designation command as the reserved storage information, Good. In this case, as the reserved memory information, the first reserved memory number addition designation command or the second reserved memory number addition that can recognize which of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory has increased as described above. A designated command may be transmitted, and a first reserved memory number designation command in which the first reserved memory number is set as EXT data, or a second reserved memory number designation command in which the second reserved memory number is set as EXT data. You may make it transmit.

  In this embodiment, the management method of the prefetching advance notice setting restriction period is shown by using the prefetching advance notice setting restriction flag. However, the management method of the prefetching advance notice setting restriction period is shown in this embodiment. It can't be limited to things.

(1) For example, the timing for determining whether or not the prefetching notice setting restriction period is in effect without performing management using a flag such as the prefetching notice setting restriction flag (for example, step S6002 of the prefetching notice effect determination process) Or the command stored in all the storage areas 1 to 8 in the start winning command storage area every time the timing symbol variation start processing (step S8000 timing) is confirmed, and the command is missed or inconsistent. You may make it determine every time whether the thing of a state remains. If there is still a command that has been missed or inconsistent, it is determined that the pre-reading notice setting limit period is in effect, and the command is missing or inconsistent. If there is no thing, it may be determined that the prefetch notice setting limit period is not in effect.

(2) Further, for example, even when management using a flag such as the prefetching advance notice setting restriction flag is performed, the number of variable displays until the reserved memory that causes the prefetching notice setting restriction is exhausted. The counter is used for management, and it is determined that the reserved memory that caused the restriction on the prefetching notice setting has been exhausted, and the prefetching notice setting restriction flag is reset to end the prefetching notice setting restriction period. May be. In this case, for example, when the prefetching notice setting limit flag is set and the prefetching notice setting restriction period is started in step S6033 of the prefetching notice effect determination process, the current total number of pending storage is set in the counter, and each change display is performed. The counter value is decremented by one. When the value of the counter reaches 0, it is determined that the reserved memory that caused the prefetching notice setting restriction has been consumed, and the prefetching notice setting restriction flag is reset to end the prefetching notice setting restriction period. Good. In this case, if a command is missed or inconsistent before the prefetching notice setting restriction period starts after setting the prefetching notice setting restriction flag and before the prefetching notice setting restriction period, It is sufficient to reset the total pending storage number in the counter and extend the pre-reading notice setting limit period until the reserved memory corresponding to the missed command or the inconsistency generated later is exhausted.

  Also, in this embodiment, when a big hit occurs, the probability change state (high probability state) is always controlled after the big hit game is finished, and a predetermined number of times (71 times in this example) after the big hit game ends. Although the case where it is applied to a gaming machine that ends the probability variation state (high probability state) based on the termination of the display is shown, the gaming machine to which the configuration shown in this embodiment can be applied is such a game. I can't stop at the machine. For example, this embodiment shows a game machine provided with a normal big hit that is controlled only in a high base state (short-time state) in addition to a probability big hit that is controlled to a promiscuous state after the big hit game ends as a big hit type. A configuration for setting and executing the prefetching notice effect or a configuration for restricting setting and execution of the prefetching notice effect may be applied. In this case, for example, when a probable big hit is made, the probable state may be controlled until the next big hit occurs while controlling to the probable state after the big hit game ends. In addition, when the big hit is normal, the high base state (time reduction state) is controlled after the big hit game is finished, and the high base state is reached at the timing when the predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of the fluctuation display is finished after the big hit game is finished. (Time-short state) may be terminated. Further, in such a game machine, when it is configured to suddenly provide a probable big hit or small win, it is in a high base state in order to make it difficult to recognize whether or not it is controlled to a probable change state (high probability state). In some cases, when sudden odd-decision jackpots are suddenly reached, a high probability state is controlled and a high base state is maintained after the big hit game based on sudden odd-variable jackpots. In some cases, it is desirable to control only to the high probability state after the big hit game based on the sudden probability change big hit and not to control to the high base state (maintain the low base state).

  In the above embodiment, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. You may mount on one board | substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 3). The sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 5 or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to sound control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  In the above embodiment, as an effect to be executed on the hold display when the display mode of the hold display is changed, a production system that suggests the possibility of a big hit (expected degree of big hit) and the possibility of super reach (super reach) Although an example in which two production systems that indicate (expected degree) exist has been described, the production system is not limited to two, and three or more production systems may exist. For example, you may make it add the production system which suggests the possibility (probability fluctuation expectation degree) of a probability fluctuation. Whether or not the probability variation occurs can be confirmed by a variation category command or a symbol designating command received by the production control microcomputer 100. Furthermore, the production system is not limited to the one shown here, and can be arbitrarily determined, for example, an production system that suggests the possibility of normal reach (normal reach expectation).

  In the above embodiment, as an effect to be executed on the hold display when the display mode of the hold display is changed, a production system that suggests the possibility of a big hit (expected degree of big hit) and the possibility of super reach (super reach) An example of a production system that suggests (expected degree) is not limited to this. For example, the production system may indicate an expected degree of probability variation big hit (whether it is probable big hit or normal big hit), and the number of rounds in the case of big hit An effect system suggesting (15R or 2R) may be used. In addition, it may be a production system that suggests a large number of fluctuations accompanied by a short time in the case of a big hit (for example, 50 or 100 times a short time), and the expected degree of rank up bonus (rank up bonus or normal It may be a production system that suggests a bonus.

  In the above embodiment, the example in which the color of the hold display changes in three stages of “no change”, “blue”, and “red” depending on the production system that suggests the degree of expectation of the jackpot is described. The expected degree may be further subdivided by setting a color (for example, yellow) having an intermediate degree of expectation between “blue” and “red”. In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the shape of the hold display changes in two stages of “not cracked” and “break” depending on the production system suggesting the super reach expectation has been described. The expectation degree may be further subdivided by setting a shape of the expectation degree between “not” and “break” (for example, “partially break”).

  In the above embodiment, an example in which the change mode of the hold display is a color or a shape has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, a motif (pattern) may be added to the holding ball.

  In the above embodiment, in both the production system that suggests the jackpot expectation and the production system that suggests the super reach expectation, the hold display is likely to change when a giant appears, and the hold display changes when a dwarf appears. Although the difficult example was demonstrated, you may make it vary the conditions where a hold display is easy to change or it is hard to change about several production systems. For example, in a production system that suggests a big hit expectation level, when the giant appears, the hold display is likely to change, and when a dwarf appears, the hold display does not change easily. Instead, the percentage of the hold display that is likely to change or hardly change may be varied depending on the color of the hammer of the appearing character (for example, gold is easy to change and brown is difficult to change). Also, in the production system that suggests super-reaching expectation, the hold display is likely to change when a giant appears, and the hold display is difficult to change when a dwarf appears. Instead, the proportion of the hold display that is likely to change or hardly change may be varied depending on the size of the brush that the appearing character has (for example, it is easy to change if it is large and difficult to change if it is small).

  In the above-described embodiment, in the pre-reading notice effect in the mode of “reserved ball change”, as a step-up notice, a dwarf with a low expected degree of change appears first, and a giant with a high expected degree of change appears later. Although an example has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the process may be branched once to an effect in which the expected degree of change is not set in the process of step-up notice. For example, in the course of the step-up notice, a character (for example, a Martian) with completely unknown change may appear, and finally a character (for example, a giant) with a high expected change may appear.

  In the above embodiment, after the start winning, the hold display based on the start winning is temporarily displayed as the normal display (see steps S6017A and S6017B), and is normally displayed immediately after the start of the change of the new effect symbol thereafter. An example in which a pre-reading notice effect in the form of “change in reserved ball” is executed for the hold display and the effect ends during the change period has been described. Here, when the pre-reading notice effect in the form of “change in holding ball” is executed over a plurality of variable displays, the holding ball is digested in the middle of the effect, and the position of the holding ball to be notified is shifted. There is a problem that the control for producing the reserved ball becomes complicated. In the above embodiment, the above-described problem does not occur because it is possible to end the production within the variation period started after the start winning prize without straddling a plurality of variations.

  In the above embodiment, the variation time specified from the variation pattern command is compared with the reserved ball change effect time, and the effect is executed only when the effect can be finished within the change period. . Here, in the above-described embodiment, when the variation time is equal to or less than the reserved ball change effect time, the effect is carried over to the next variation (see step S8017C). It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the pre-reading notice effect in the “change” mode is not executed due to the shortening variation.

  In the above embodiment, after the start winning, the hold display based on the start winning is temporarily displayed as the normal display (see steps S6017A and S6017B), and is normally displayed immediately after the start of the change of the new effect symbol thereafter. Although an example in which a pre-reading notice effect in the form of “holding ball change” is performed on the hold display and the effect ends during the change period has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal of steps S6017A and S6017B is not limited to this. Immediately after the display (before the start of the next change), the pre-reading notice effect determined in step S6018B or step S6019B may be performed for the normal display. In this case, the time until stoppage of the variable display is counted, and only when the time until stoppage of the variable display when the normal display is performed in S6017A and S6017B is longer than the production time. It is preferable to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the form of “reserved ball change”.

  In the above embodiment, after the start winning, the hold display based on the start winning is temporarily displayed as the normal display (see steps S6017A and S6017B), and is normally displayed immediately after the start of the change of the new effect symbol thereafter. Although an example of executing the pre-reading notice effect in the form of “change in hold ball” for the hold display has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and “change in hold ball” after a predetermined time from the start of the change of the new effect symbol. You may make it perform the prefetch notice effect of an aspect.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which a new pre-reading notice effect is not executed when a pre-reading notice effect of a mode other than “change in reserved ball” is executed (Y in step S6002) has been described. Even when a pre-reading notice effect of a mode other than "" is executed, when it is determined to execute a pre-reading notice of a "holding ball change" mode in the prefetching notice effect determination process, a "holding ball change" mode The pre-reading notice may be executed. For example, even if YES is determined in step S6002, the processing in step S6003 and subsequent steps is performed, and only in the case where it is confirmed in step S6012 that the pre-reading notice in the “reserved ball change” mode is not executed, step S6020. You may make it transfer to the process of.

  In the above-described embodiment, in step S6018A, the effect control CPU 101 determines an effect system (either “color change” or “shape change”) when performing a pre-reading notice effect of “holding ball change”. A random number for determining the production system is extracted at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of receiving a command at the time of one of the start winning prizes). If there is a “change in shape”, it may be executed alternately so that the “color change” or “shape change” effects are not continuously executed. Then, a lottery may be performed with a lower probability that the executed performance system will occur next time.

  In the above embodiment, in step S6018C, it is determined whether or not a holding ball having a color (for example, red) having a higher expectation than the determined color (for example, blue) is displayed. An example in which a low-priority notice effect (effect to change to blue) is not described has been described. However, in step 6018C, when a holding ball having a high expectation degree (for example, “break”) is displayed, the expectation degree The low notice effect (the effect of changing to blue) may not be performed. In the above-described embodiment, in step S6019C, it is determined whether or not a holding ball having a shape (for example, “break”) with a higher expectation than the determined shape (for example, “not broken”) is displayed. In this case, the example in which the notice effect with a low degree of expectation (“not broken” effect) is not performed has been described. However, when a reserved ball with a high degree of expectation (for example, red) is displayed in step 6019C. May not perform the notice effect (“not broken” effect) with low expectation. As described above, when a high-expectation effect is performed in different effect systems, an effect with a low expectation level may not be performed even in other effect systems. For example, when the production with the highest degree of expectation is performed in one production system, it is preferable to set a criterion such that no production other than the highest degree of expectation is performed in the other production system.

  In the above embodiment, an example has been described in which a holding ball is unlikely to change when a dwarf appears, and a holding ball is likely to change when a giant appears, but a holding ball when a dwarf appears. Is difficult to change, but when it changes, the degree of expectation is increased (for example, when the dwarf paints the holding ball as in the above embodiment, the expectation of the big hit is extremely high, and the dwarf breaks the holding ball) Sometimes the super-reach expectation is extremely high), and when a giant appears, the reserved ball is likely to change, but when it changes, the expectation may be lowered. That is, the high rate of change of the hold display and the reliability of the notice may be made different.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the pre-reading notice effect for changing the holding ball is executed, the specific effect is executed and the display mode of the holding display is changed (for example, a dwarf or a giant appears and the holding ball is removed with a hammer. An example of performing a splitting operation or performing an operation of painting a color on a holding ball with a brush has been described. On the other hand, the effect control microcomputer 100, after the start of the variation display of the effect symbol, the notice effect indicating whether or not the display result of the variation display becomes a jackpot symbol (pre-reading advance notice of the change of the holding ball) Unlike the effect, for example, the mini character notice effect set in step S8017D) may be executed in an effect manner common to the pre-read notice effect of the reserved ball change. For example, when a big hit symbol is derived and displayed, a dwarf or a giant may appear after the start of the variation of the effect symbol, and an effect of writing the characters “Intense Heat” on the display screen with a brush may be executed. In this way, during the variation display of the effect symbol, by making the notice effect that suggests whether the display result will be a big hit symbol and the pre-reading notice effect of the change in the reserved ball as a common effect mode, for example, a brush A player cannot determine whether a pre-reading advance notice for a change in the holding ball is executed or a notice for the display result of the moving symbol is executed only by seeing the dwarf or giant who has appeared on the screen And since it comes to pay attention to the subsequent actions of the dwarf and the giant, the production effect can be enhanced. That is, it is suggested whether or not the display result of the first hold effect (color change) and the effect symbol on which the variable display is performed is a big hit (whether or not the big hit is generated by the currently executed change). Sharing the production from the start of the production (for example, the appearance of a dwarf or giant) to a predetermined period (for example, before the dwarf or giant paints the color of the holding ball with a brush or writes the word “hot” on the display screen) It is good to make it.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the pre-reading notice effect for changing the holding ball is executed, the specific effect is executed and the display mode of the holding display is changed (for example, a dwarf or a giant appears and the holding ball is removed with a hammer. An example of performing a splitting operation or performing an operation of painting a color on a holding ball with a brush has been described. On the other hand, the production control microcomputer 100, after the production symbol variation display is started, indicates whether or not the variation display is accompanied by a super reach (a pre-reading announcement of the change in the holding ball). Unlike the effect, for example, the mini character notice effect set in step S8017D) may be executed in an effect manner common to the pre-read notice effect of the reserved ball change. For example, when developing into super reach, a dwarf or a giant may appear after the start of the change of the effect design, and an effect of hitting an enemy character on the display screen with a hammer may be executed. In this way, during the change display of the production symbol, by making the announcement effect that suggests whether or not to develop into super reach and the pre-reading announcement effect of the change in the holding ball as a common effect mode, for example, with a hammer By just seeing a dwarf or giant appear on the screen, the player cannot determine whether a pre-reading advance notice of a change in the holding ball is executed or a notice that suggests the possibility of super reach development is executed And since it comes to pay attention to the subsequent actions of the dwarf and the giant, the production effect can be enhanced. That is, the second hold effect (shape change) and the start of the effect suggesting whether or not the change display of the effect symbol develops into super reach (for example, the appearance of a dwarf or a giant) for a predetermined period (for example, a dwarf or a giant). It is recommended that the production until the player hits the holding ball with a hammer or hits an enemy character on the display screen).

  In the above embodiment, the period from the occurrence of the reserved memory subject to the pre-reading notice effect of the change in the reserved ball (after the start winning is generated) to the start of the variation related to the reserved memory is the effect display device. The background screen displayed at 9 may be a predetermined special screen. That is, it is preferable that the effect control microcomputer 100 displays a special screen during a period in which the pre-reading notice execution flag for the reserved ball change is set. Here, the special screen may be made different depending on the reserved ball change effect system (whether it is a color change effect or a shape change effect). For example, the production control microcomputer 100 refers to the holding ball display processing table (for example, see FIGS. 65 and 66) at the time of starting winning, and if the producing number related to the starting winning is AXX (color change), If the first special screen (for example, a clear sky screen) is displayed and the production number related to the start winning is BXX (shape change), the second special screen (for example, a heavy rain screen) may be displayed. According to this, since the background image also becomes a special background when the pre-reading notice effect of the reserved ball change is executed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, by changing the background image depending on whether the first holding effect (color change) or the second holding effect (shape change), the pre-reading notice relates to the jackpot expectation as compared with the case of only the holding ball change. It becomes easier for the player to grasp whether the event is related to the super-reaching expectation level, and the effect of production is further enhanced.

  Further, the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 is set as a predetermined special screen during the period from when the start winning is made as described above until the change related to the hold storage based on the start winning is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 67, when the variation display B immediately after the start winning prize is a shortened variation, the effect of the retained ball variation is carried over to the next variation (variation display C). Since it is possible to display a special screen, the background screen can be a special screen during the variable display B. As described above, it is possible to execute the pre-reading notice effect on the special screen prior to the change of the holding ball. In this case, the player expects that the pre-reading notice of the change of the holding ball will be executed because the background image becomes a special screen at the time of the fluctuation display B, and the player actually holds the ball at the time of the fluctuation display C of the next fluctuation. An effect of change is executed. In this way, by executing the pre-reading notice effects in different modes step by step, the effects can be diversified and the effect can be enhanced.

  Further, the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 is a predetermined special screen during a period from when the start winning is generated until the start of the change related to the hold storage based on the start winning as described above. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 refers to the start winning command storage area to determine whether or not the symbol designation command corresponding to the reserved memory indicates a big hit. Both the effect of changing the sphere (for example, color change) and the effect of the special screen (for example, displaying a clear sky screen) may be executed with a high probability. On the other hand, when the symbol designating command corresponding to the reserved memory shows a loss, it is preferable that only one of the effect of changing the reserved ball or the effect of the special screen is executed with a predetermined probability.

  Further, the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 is a predetermined special screen during a period from when the start winning is generated until the start of the change related to the hold storage based on the start winning as described above. In such a case, the production control microcomputer 100 refers to the start winning command storage area, determines whether or not the variable category command corresponding to the reserved storage is a command indicating super reach, and indicates super reach For example, both a reserved ball change effect (for example, shape change) and a special screen effect (for example, display of a heavy rain screen) may be executed with high probability. On the other hand, when the variable category command corresponding to the reserved storage does not indicate super reach, it is preferable that only one of the effect of changing the held ball or the effect of the special screen is executed with a predetermined probability.

  In the above embodiment, the period from the occurrence of the reserved memory subject to the pre-reading notice effect of the change in the reserved ball (after the start winning is generated) to the start of the variation related to the reserved memory is the effect display device. The background screen displayed at 9 may be a predetermined special screen. That is, it is preferable that the effect control microcomputer 100 displays a special screen during a period in which the pre-reading notice execution flag for the reserved ball change is set. Here, the special screen may be displayed with a high probability when the display result is a big hit, and may be different depending on the type of the big hit. For example, the production control microcomputer 100 refers to the start winning command storage area at the time of starting winning, and determines whether the symbol designation command corresponding to the reserved storage indicates 15R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit. When the 15R probability variation big hit is shown, the first special screen (for example, a clear sky screen) is displayed with a high probability, and when the 2R probability variation big hit is shown, the second special screen (for example, a heavy rain screen) is displayed with a high probability. Good. Further, when there is a 15R probability variable big hit and a rank up bonus, it is determined whether the symbol designation command indicates a 15R probability variable big hit or a rank up bonus. For example, a clear sky screen) is displayed with a high probability, and in the case of showing a rank-up bonus, the second special screen (for example, a heavy rain screen) may be displayed with a high probability. In addition, when there are a plurality of special variable winning ball devices (for example, two special variable winning ball devices A and B), and different special winning ball devices are opened according to the type of jackpot, a symbol designation command is issued. It is determined whether the big hit A with the opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus A or the big hit B with the opening of the special variable winning ball apparatus B is shown. If the big hit A is shown, the first special screen (for example, a clear sky screen) ) Is displayed with a high probability, and when the big hit B is indicated, the second special screen (for example, a heavy rain screen) may be displayed with a high probability.

  In the above embodiment, when a specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the fluctuation display unit (first special symbol display 8a, second special symbol display 8b), a predetermined symbol fixed stop time (for example, After 0.5 second, the bonus special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is stopped and displayed), and the effect accompanying the transition to a specific gaming state (big winning gaming state) such as a fanfare effect. Is executed, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is released and controlled to a specific gaming state. In other words, a gaming machine in which a specific display result is derived and displayed on the variation display unit and controlled to a specific gaming state after a predetermined time has been illustrated. Not limited to this, after the specific display result is derived and displayed on the variable display section, the specific game state is based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific prize opening or gate) provided in the game area. It may be a gaming machine controlled by the above. With such a gaming machine, the player can control the start timing of the specific gaming state. For example, even if the ball breaks after the derivation display of the specific display result, since the opening of the big winning opening is not started immediately, the player replenishes the ball and fires it into the game area (passes through the specific area). Time can be secured.

  In addition, in a gaming machine having such a specific area, it has a plurality of specific areas, and a specific game state of a different type (for example, the number of rounds is different) depending on which specific area the game ball has passed. You may make it control to. For example, when there are three specific areas A to C, the game is controlled to a 15R big hit game state when a game ball passes through the specific area A, and a 10R big hit game when the game ball passes through the specific area B. The state may be controlled so that when a game ball passes through the specific area C, it is controlled to a 2R jackpot gaming state. In addition, in a gaming machine having such a specific area, a lottery may be performed in which a big hit type is determined based on the fact that a game ball has passed through the specific area. For example, a jackpot type determination random number may be extracted at the timing when the game ball passes through a specific area, and controlled to the jackpot gaming state with the number of rounds according to the extracted random number value. Further, in a gaming machine having such a specific area, a lottery is performed to determine the big hit type based on the fact that the game ball has passed through any one of the specific areas. May be. For example, when there are three specific areas A to C, the big hit type determination random number is extracted at the timing when the game ball passes through any one of the specific areas, and 80 when the game ball passes through the specific area A. If the game ball passes through the specific area B with reference to the table determined for the jackpot of 15R at the rate of 15R, 10R at the rate of 20%, 15R, 80% at the rate of 20% The type of jackpot is determined with reference to the table determined for 10R jackpot at the rate of 2R, and when the game ball passes through the specific area C, 2R is determined at a rate of 50%, and 15R jackpot is determined at a rate of 50% The jackpot type may be determined by referring to the table to be processed. That is, the lottery ratio of the number of rounds may be varied depending on which specific area the game ball passes through.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8a 1st special symbol display device 8b 2nd special symbol display device 9 Production display device 13 1st starting winning port 14 2nd starting winning port 20 Special variable winning ball device 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Game control microcomputer 80 Production control board 100 Production control microcomputer 101 Production control CPU
109 VDP

Claims (1)

Fluctuation in which a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed based on the establishment of a variation display start condition that allows the variation display to start after the game medium passes through the start area. A gaming machine that includes a display unit and causes a transition to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the specific display result is derived and displayed on the variation display unit,
Numerical data extraction means for extracting numerical data when a game medium passes through the starting area;
For the variable display in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the game medium has passed through the start area, the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means is stored as reserved storage up to a predetermined upper limit number. Holding storage means;
Whether the variable display is in a predetermined first state using the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means before the start condition based on the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means is satisfied. Determining means for determining whether or not the change display is in a predetermined second state different from the first state;
Whether or not to change the display to the first state using the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means when the start condition based on the numerical data extracted by the numerical data extraction means is satisfied And start state determination means for determining whether or not to change the display to the second state;
A hold display control means for displaying a hold display of the number of the hold memories in a predetermined display mode;
Based on the determination result of the determination means, a first notification effect for notifying that there is a possibility of becoming the first state and a second notification effect for notifying that there is a possibility of being in the second state, Notice effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute before the start condition is established based on the numerical data subjected to determination by the determining means;
A notice effect execution means for executing the notice effect based on the fact that the notice effect is determined to be executed by the notice effect determining means,
Based on the decision to execute the first notice effect, the notice effect executing means changes the display mode of the hold display to the first display mode, and changes the display mode of the hold display to the first display. The display mode of the hold display is different from the first display mode based on the determination that the first hold effect is executed for the hold display when the mode is changed and the second notice effect is executed. A game machine characterized by changing to the second display mode and executing a second hold effect on the hold display when the display mode of the hold display is changed to the second display mode.

Images